Home

SMC Networks SMC6824M User's Manual

1. Menu Description Page Copy Settings Enables mapping IP Precedence and DSCP 3 215 Priority settings to ports or trunks ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding output 3 216 queue for packets matching an ACL rule ACL Marker Change traffic priorities for frames matching 3 218 an ACL tule IGMP Snooping 3 220 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures 3 222 parameters for multicast query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a 3 224 Port Information neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a 3 225 Port Configuration neighboring multicast router switch IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this 3 226 Table switch including multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Indicates multicast addresses associated with 3 228 Port Table the selected VLAN DNS 3 229 General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and 3 229 domain list and specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name to 3 232 address mapping Cache Displays cache entries discovered by 3 234 designated name servers Only the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE support Power over Ethernet BASIC CONFIGURATION Basic Configuration Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by pr
2. Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled MSTP Protocol Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 15 Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Hybrid tagged untagged frames Mode GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Ingress Port Priority 0 Prioritization Weighted Round Robin Queue 0 1 2 3 Weight 1 4 16 64 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Port Priority Disabled 1 9 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default IP Settings Management VLAN 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE only 1 10 CHAPTER 2 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of manage
3. 4 265 show map ip port 6 ee cece eee 4 266 show map ip precedence 0 eee cece 4 267 show map ip dscp 0 6 cece cece eee 4 268 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 269 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 0 eee eee eee 4 269 ip gmp snooping 2 1 ee eee 4 270 ip igmp snooping vlan static 0 eee eee 4 270 ip igmp snooping version 6 c eee eee eee 4 271 show ip igmp snooping 6 eee eee ee 4 272 show mac addtess table multicast 00 4 272 XV T4BLE OF CONTENTS xvi IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 1 0 0 0 000000 4 273 ip igmp snooping queriet 06 eee eee ee eee 4 273 ip igmp snooping query count 00 0 000s 4 274 ip igmp snooping query interval 0 0000 4 275 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 276 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 277 Static Multicast Routing Commands 0048 4 278 ip igmp snooping vlan mroutet 00008 4 278 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 0 0000 4 279 TEP Taterface Comimiatids s uea i ct agate uh ek inte dca oe hast ea 4 280 ipaddress isch gaa ona Son es het Nh teas 4 280 ip default gateway gt s cucos ek cs Sats Me eee a te le 4 282 Iprdhcp restates schtick Aaa A cena Aaa oy 4 282 Show ID Iterace il sea sds lly NR A ka atte Ss 4 283 show iptedirects ic tease etude a hyd ihe A ae Oe 4 284 PUL atte anc
4. 4 17 LINE COMMANDS exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI and Telnet 600 seconds 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line 4 18 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh breshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of
5. 3 71 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 72 Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols Remote Authentication Dial in User Service a RADIUS and Terminal p Web Access Controller Access Telnet A console Control System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols RADIUS TACACS that use software running server rren PRAA 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACAC
6. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands show ip access list 4 128 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 134 map access list ip This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list ip ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the tule 4 135 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS e A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see queue cos map on page 4 257 Table 4 37 Egress Queue Priority Mapping Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue co
7. To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 6 Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port Port identifier Range 1 26 3 121 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 122 Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 6 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk Unitl Port24 Trunk1 Unit Port24 zaa Trunk 1 i J unt fel Remove a Port Figure 3 52 Static Trunk Configuration CLI This example creates trunk 1 with port 24 on unit 1 and 2 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 1 4 171 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 24 4 171 Console config if channel group 1 4 190 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 2 24 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end
8. 0 0 00000 ee 4 219 SPannino tree COSt y aani bid Seal Sh oe date we dia 4 220 spanning tree port priority 2 6 eee ee eee 4 221 spanning tree edge port 6 cee eee 4 221 spanning tree portfast 6 6 eee eee 4 222 spanning tree link type 2 0 eee eee eee 4 223 spamning tree MSt COSt 66 eee eee 4 224 spanning tree mst port priority 0666 6 6 eee 4 225 spanning tree protocol migration 1 0 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 4 226 show spanning tree u ais dar eaea eee eee 4 227 show spanning tree mst configuration 0008 4 229 VLAN Gommiands 2 20 oon ede dk ede dae Daa ais 4 230 Editing VLAN Groups 2 0 0 0 cece cece eee 4 230 Vian databases unod 3224 6 veal Sided eaaa diae da eaaa 4 230 VIAT a a ene eae a O eh Ree Se ead ie aos 4 231 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 0 000 4 232 interface VIAN joie A iced th Sea eal Soe a 4 233 switchpottimode eras eo hoagie ud a ages ie koa a agades bs 4 234 switchport acceptable frame types 000004 4 235 switchport ingress filtering 6 6 eee 4 236 switchport native vlan 6 6 eee 4 237 switchport allowed vlan 0 0 4 238 switchport forbidden vlan 0 c ee eee 4 239 Displaying VLAN Information 0000 00008 4 240 SKOWE VLA tes Gets Peet ohare aaa tye E 4 240 Configuring Private VLANs 0 00 e eee eee eee 4 241 privatesvian ainan a heed ad aed aad tt tee 4 243 ptivate vlan association 6 eee 4 244 switchport mod
9. Related Commands snmp setver contact 4 154 4 155 SNMP COMMANDS snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host ost addr inform retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port pori no snmp server host ost addr host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 recipient destination IP address entries inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters e version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps
10. 0 eee 3 44 Figure 3 21 Setting the Time Zone 0 eee eee eee 3 45 Figure 3 22 Enabling the SNMP Agent 00000000 3 48 Figure 3 23 Configuring SNMP Community Strings 3 49 Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers 3 52 Figure 3 25 Setting an Engine ID 0 eee 3 54 Figure 3 26 Setting an Engine ID 0 cee eee 3 55 Figure 3 27 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 0 000 e ee eee 3 57 Figure 3 28 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3 60 Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 000 00005 3 66 Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 00 ee ee eee 3 68 Figure 3 31 Configuring User Accounts 0 00 eee eee 3 71 Figure 3 32 Authentication Server Settings 0000 3 74 Figure 3 33 HTTPS Settings 2 00 cc e eve eee ees a eee ee eae ees 3 77 Figure 3 34 SSH Host Key Settings 0 0 0 c cece eee 3 82 Figure 3 35 SSH Server Settings 0 cece eee eee 3 84 Figure 3 36 Enabling Port Security 00 0 0 cece eee ee 3 87 FIGURES Xxiv Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Fig
11. Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 263 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues e This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type 4 264 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This c
12. Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy 3 141 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 142 Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames he total number of good frames received that were CRC Alignment Errors E directed to this multicast address T he number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize
13. Model Level Group Read Write Notify Security View View View vl noAuth public defaultview none none Community string NoPriv read only only vl noAuth private defaultview defaultview none Community string NoPriv read only write vl noAuth user user defined user defined user Community string NoPriv defined defined only v2c noAuth public defaultview none none Community string NoPriv read only only v2c noAuth private defaultview defaultview none Community string NoPriv read only write v2c noAuth user user defined user defined user Community string NoPriv defined defined only v3 noAuth user user defined user defined user A usert name match NoPriv defined defined only v3 Auth user user defined user defined user Provides user NoPriv defined defined authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms v3 Auth user user defined user defined user Provides user Priv defined defined authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES 56 bit encryption Note The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system You can then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access 3 47 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Enabling the SNMP Agent Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status Enables SNM
14. clear mac address table dynamic show 4 202 This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan v an id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet wuit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 e sort Sort by address vlan or interface COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0
15. show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 4 24 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands context sensitive enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 25 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 26 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 27 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 27 reload Restarts the system PE 4 28 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 29 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or any 4 29 exits the CLI quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 30 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion any NA additional commands are available and certain c
16. PORT CONFIGURATION Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 179 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX ac address 00 30 F1 B3 16 C5 Configuration ame Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Enabled Port security Disabled ax MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None ember Ports Eth1 24 Eth2 24 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage e To avoid creating a loop in the network be f dynamically sure you enable LACP before connecting enabled the ports and also disconnect the ports _ FL before disabling LACP f active backup e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP lins SH P iink on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically LETTET A trunk formed with another switch using configured members LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on
17. The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch Command Attributes Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 packets per second Broadcast Control Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Web Click Port Broadcast Control Set the threshold any port click Apply Broadcast Control Threshold 500 262143 500 packets sec Broadcast Control Status M Enabled Figure 3 58 Enabling Port Broadcast Control 3 135 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 60 packets per second for port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 177 Console config if exit 4 29 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 171 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 60 4 177 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 4 182 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold Enabled 60 packets second LACP status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 100M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 100M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 GVRP stat
18. CST e Use the show spanning tree mst nstance_id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST e For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 160 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 165 Example Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree Spanning tree Spanning tree Instance VLANs configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age backup root SEGo 2 sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost CIST path cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method enabled disabled priority format sec MSTP enabled 802 1t disabled 0 1 4093 32768 2 20 15 2 20 15 20 20 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 26 20000 0 4 7124 long 4 228 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Eth 1 1 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External path cost 200000 Internal path cost 200000 Priority 128 Designated cost 20000 Designated port DAIR Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00
19. Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled 1 7 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Password super Normal Exec Level RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Enabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP SNMP Agent Enabled Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP V3 View defaultview Group public read only private read write Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled 1 8 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Power over Status Enabled all ports Ethernet Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports
20. SMTP status Enabled Console Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 22 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 69 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 70 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 71 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE 4 72 PE 4 68 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 22 Time Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 73 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 74 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE 4 74 PE sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for l
21. 32 urg Urgent pointer e For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP le config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any ination port 80 Le config ext acl 4 127 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 123 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name N
22. Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3 112 After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egtess Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL ACCESS CONTROL LISTS When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in the ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes Port Fixed port or optional module SFP port Range 1 26 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port e MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port IN ACL for ingress packets e OUT ACL for egress packets ACL Name Name of the ACL Web Clic
23. Configuring the Secure Shell 3 78 The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as r ogin remote login rsh remote shell and rep remote copy ate not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 USER AUTHENTICATION Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication S
24. Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 43 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree 4 163 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 43 show snmp view display description Continued Field Description View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp setver group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readvien write writevien notify notifyvien no snmp setver group groupname e groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters e vl v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 36 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters e writeview Defines the view for write access
25. Figure 3 35 SSH Server Settings CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 47 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 48 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 49 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 53 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh 4 53 Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console disconnect 0 Console 3 84 USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sen
26. ip telnet server port port number no telnet server port port The TCP port number used by the Telnet interface port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 4 43 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Default Setting e Server Enabled e Server Port 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config Secure Shell Commands 4 44 The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and r remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However
27. the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and 4 14 Telnet including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering pr
28. 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model 3 55 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 56 AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned gro
29. 4 97 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS authentication login 4 98 This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config authentication login rad
30. Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 45 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 4 156 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting e Host Address None e Notification Type Traps e SNMP Version 1 e UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Ifyou do not enter an snmp setver host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a t
31. Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 235 4 234 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types e all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only passes tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic passed on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 234 4 235 VLAN COMMANDS switchport ingress filtering
32. This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLAWNs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded e Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if 4 236 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan v an id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Com
33. Use the no form to restore the default setting to increments specified by IEEE 802 1t Syntax spanning tree default priority 802 1D 1998 802 1t 2001 no spanning tree default priority 802 1D 1998 Specifies priority increments of 1 per IEEE 802 1D 802 1t 2001 Specifies priority increments of 4096 per IEEE 802 1t Default Setting IEEE 802 1t format Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage IEEE 802 1D priority format cannot be used for a switch that is a member of an MIST If you select 802 1D priority format for a bridge in this state the system will return an error message Example Console config spanning tree default priority 802 1D 1998 Console config spanning tree priority Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 4 211 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same
34. no power inline compatible 4 91 POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch automatically detects attached PoE devices by periodically transmitting test voltages that over the 10 100BASE TX ports When an 802 3af compatible device is plugged into one of these ports the powered device reflects the test voltage back to the switch which may then turn on the power to this device When the power inline compatible command is used this switch can detect 802 3f compliant devices and the more recent 802 3af non compliant devices that also reflect the test voltages back to the switch It cannot detect other legacy devices that do not reflect back the test voltages e For legacy devices to be supported by this switch they must be able to accept power over the data pairs connected to the 10 100BASE TX ports Example Console config power inline compatible Console config end Console show power inline status Unit 1 Compatible mode Enabled Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 1 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 2 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 3 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 4 enable off 15400 0 low 5 enable off 15400 0 low 4 92 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE power inline This command instructs the switch to automatically detect if a PoE compliant device is connected to the specified port and turn power on or
35. radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius servet key key_string no radius setver key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 102 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config radius server key green Console config tadius setver retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no tadius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config tadius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no tadius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 seconds 4 103 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configura
36. the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMP v3 construct for the default public community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the BASIC CONFIGURATION entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 67 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level The default strings are e public Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects T
37. 0 Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that 13 STA Port Configuration only 3 177 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 178 when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200
38. 0 59 month january february march april may june july august september october november december e day Day of month Range 1 31 e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 March 21st 2003 Console calendar set 15 12 34 March 21 2003 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 74 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to display the current system clock setting Console show calendar 15 12 50 March 21 2003 Console System Status Commands Table 4 23 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show Displays the contents of the configuration file PE 4 75 startup config stored in flash memory that is used to start up the system show Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 77 running config show system Displays system information NE 4 79 PE show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions NE 4 80 including user name idle time and IP address of PE Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE 4 80 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to star
39. 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 1OOBASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface 4 172 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 173 capabilities 4 174 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable auto
40. 4 196 show lacp internal display description 4 197 show lacp neighbors display description 4 199 Address Table Commands 0000000 ee 4 200 show lacp sysid display description 4 200 Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 56 e 4 57 e 4 58 e 4 59 e 4 60 e 4 61 e 4 62 e 4 63 e 4 64 e 4 65 e 4 66 e 4 67 e 4 68 e 4 69 e 4 70 e 4 71 e 4 72 e 4 73 e 4 74 e 4 75 e B 1 TABLES Spanning Tree Commands 00000 4 204 VLAN Commands oori ae a a aea dc aeae da Aaah 4 230 Editing VLAN Groups 0 00 0 cece eee eee 4 230 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 0008 4 232 Displaying VLAN Information 4 4 240 Private VLAN Commands 0 0000 4 241 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 248 Priority Commands 0 0 eee eee 4 253 Priority Commands Layer 2 0 0 ee eee eee 4 254 Default CoS Priority Levels 0 0 0 0 4 258 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 4 260 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values 4 263 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values 4 265 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 4 269 IGMP Snooping Commands 0 000005 4 269 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 273 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 278 IP Interface Command Syntax 0
41. Click Priority IP Port Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority Interface G Port x C Trunk z Select Jfr IP Port Priority Table IP Port Number TCP UDP Class of Service Value on Remove IP Port Figure 3 96 Mapping Ports and Trunks to IP TCP UDP Priority 22 Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 214 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings for that port Console config map ip port 4 261 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 262 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 4 266 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Copy Settings Use the Copy Settings page to copy IP Precedence Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings and IP Port Priority Settings from a source port or trunk to a destination port or trunk Note Port priority settings apply globally to all ports on the switch Due to a har
42. Enable 802 1X globally for the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control I Enabled Figure 3 38 802802 1X Global Configuration CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dotlx system auth control 4 111 Console config 3 90 USER AUTHENTICATION Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dotlx aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise This is the defau
43. Figure 3 24 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 inform private version 2c udp port 160 4 156 Console config snmp server enable traps authentication 4 159 Console config 3 These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View page 3 61 3 52 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID it must be changed first before configuring other parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting the Local Engine ID An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch
44. From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week 800 SMC 4 YOU 949 679 8000 Fax 949 679 1481 From Europe 8 00 AM 5 30 PM UK Time 44 0 118 974 8700 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 INTERNET E mail addresses techsupport smc com european techsupport smc europe com support smc asia com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com http www smc europe com http www smc asia com FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE CALL U S A and Canada 800 SMC 4 YOU Fax 949 679 1481 Spain 34 93 477 4935 Fax 34 93 477 3774 UK 44 0 118 974 8700 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 France 33 0 41 38 32 32 Fax 33 0 41 38 01 58 Italy 39 02 739 12 33 Fax 39 02 739 14 17 Benelux 31 33 455 72 88 Fax 31 33 455 73 30 Central Europe 49 0 89 92861 0 Fax 49 0 89 92861 230 Switzerland 41 0 1 9409971 Fax 41 0 1 9409972 Nordic 46 0 868 70700 Fax 46 0 887 62 62 Northern Europe 44 0 118 974 8700 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 Eastern Europe 34 93 477 4920 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Sub Saharan Africa 27 11 314 1133 Fax 27 11 314 9133 North Africa 34 93 477 4920 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Russia 7 095 290 29 96 Fax 7 095 290 29 96 PRC 86 21 6485 9922 Fax 86 21 6495 7924 Taiwan 886 2 8797 8006 Fax 886 2 8797 6288 Asia Pacific 65 238 6556 Fax 65 238 6466 Korea 82 2 553 0860 Fax 82 2 553 7202 Japan 81 3 5645 5715 Fax 81 3 5645 5716 Australia
45. IC 4 93 maximum allocation switch ports power inline priority Sets the priority for power supplied to specific IC 4 94 ports show power inline Displays the current status of power PE 4 95 status management on specific ports or all ports show power Displays the current status of power PE 4 96 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE power mainpower maximum allocation This command defines a power budget for the switch i e the power available to all switch ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power mainpower maximum allocation lt wa s gt unit unii e watts The power budget for the switch Range 37 375 watts e unit Specifies the stack unit Range 1 8 Default Setting 375 watts Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Setting a maximum power budget for the switch enables power to be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power Example Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 300 Console config Related Commands power inline priority 4 94 power inline compatible This command allows the switch to detect and provide power to powered devices that were designed prior to the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax
46. IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol Glossary 2 GLOSSARY IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Taggine Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the SMC6824MPE switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEE 802 3af PoE An IEEE standard for providing Power over Ethernet PoE capabilities When Ethernet is passed over copper cable two twisted pairs are used for data transfer and two twisted pairs are unused With PoE power can either be passed over the two data pairs or over the two spate pairs IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query an
47. Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Recewed Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded a Recewed Unknown 0 Packets Packets i Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast let Unicast Packets S Packets ii 2420 Transmit Broadcast 7 Transmit Discarded 0 Packets Packets Transmit Errors 0 zl Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors y OlLate Collisions 0 FCS Errors O Excessive Collisions 0 Internal MAC Transmit Single Collision Frames Ens 0 Multiple Collision Frames O Carrier Sense Errors 0 SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long 0 Deferred Transmissions era MAC Rocsio 0 mors RMON Statistics Drop Events D Jabbers o Received Bytes 188155 Collisions o Received Frames 0 64 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 47 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frarnes 0512 1023 Bytes Frames o Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh Figure 3 61 Port Statistics 3 144 POWER OVER ETHERNET SETTINGS CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 180 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown
48. Modify the parameters required and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Operation Max Count Port States Mode 1 20 Mode e Q authen 1 Disabled MumHost 5 Force Authorized F Enable f 60 3600 30 Disabled Single Host gt Force Authorized I Enable fz 60 3600 30 Re MaxReq OVI suthen Tx Period Authorized Supplicant Trunk Period Pariod 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 09 00 3 Disabled Singie Host Force Authorized I Enable f 60 3600 po ee 4 Disabled Single Host Force Avthorized E M Enable f2 5o a E a 00 5 Disabled Single Host Force Authorized 2 i Enable f2 ko 3600 fo ey 4 Figure 3 39 802 1X Port Configuration CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 4 116 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 171 Console config if dotlx port control auto 4 112 Console config if dotlx re authentication 4 114 Console config if dotlx max req 5 4 111 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 40 4 115 Console config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 5 4 115 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period 40 4 116 Console config if end USER AUTHENTICATION Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Oper
49. Operation speed duplex Eth1 2 status port channel 1 100TX 00 04 E2 B3 16 D6 Up Auto 10half Enabled Disabled 0 10full LACP Up Up 100full None Eth1 3 Eth1 4 100half 4 179 100full Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 194 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 194 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed ie it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 193 3 125 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 126 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch Port Port number Range 1 26 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link ageregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to
50. PEE a CE Figure 3 89 Configuring Traffic Classes CLI 8 The following example shows how to map CoS values 1 and 2 to CoS priority queue 0 value 0 and 3 to CoS priority queue 1 values 4 and 5 to CoS priority queue 2 and values 6 and 7 to CoS priority queue 3 Conso Conso config interface ethernet 1 1 e e config queue cos map 0 1 4 257 e Console config queue Console config queue Console config exit Consol Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 012 Priority Queue 1 0 0 Console cos map 2 4 cos map 3 6 config queue cos map 1 0 Console sh queue cos map ethernet 3 5 7 1 2 3 WoO 4 2 saumwW Nh 1 1 4 260 18 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 205 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Selecting the Queue Mode 3 206 You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with
51. Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 e GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a Leave All query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 e Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 15 Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 3 193 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration Port PVID GARP GARP nl Join Leave Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Timer Hee Mode Trunk Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi s ds Memb
52. Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost CIST path cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec Transmission limit Path Cost Method MSTP enabled disabled 0 1 4093 32768 2 20 Ta 2 20 Ja 20 20 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 26 20000 0 9 213425 long 3 159 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Eth 1 1 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External path cost 200000 Internal path cost 200000 Priority 128 Designated cost 20000 Designated port 128 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0004E2B316C0 Fast forwarding enabled Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enabled Oper edge port enabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members W
53. Timeout The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds 3 51 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Retry times The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 e Enable Authentication Traps Issues a notification message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a notification message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled Web Click SNMP Configuration Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages specify the UDP port trap version trap security level for v3 clients trap inform settings for v2c v3 clients and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address fio 1 19 23 Trap Manager Community String private none Trap UDP Port fiso lt lt Add Trap Version 2c Remove Trap Security Level noAuthNoPriv Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs Trap Inform Retry times 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps v Enable Link up and Link down Traps I H
54. Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac addtess table static mac address interface interface vlan vlan id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface ethernet wuit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command 4 201 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config
55. Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples e included Defines an included view excluded Defines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree 4 162 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example
56. and click Apply Port Configuration Port Name Admin ere Flow Control Autonegotiation Trunk Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 1 100full jisabled M Enablel 100full Di M10 M100f mM 1000f TFC Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 2 rootu Disabled E Benes seemed m10 M 100F 10007 MFC m Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 3 oorun E M Enable L100 M tof M 100f m 1000f Mec Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 4 100full F Enable 100r E m10 m 100f m 1000f M FC Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym fi ull Disebied 5 M Enable Mor M 100f m1000 M FC E Figure 3 51 Configuring Port Attributes CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 171 Console config if shutdown 4 176 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 173 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 172 Console config if flowcontrol 4 175 Conso config if negotiation Conso config if capabilities 100half 4 174 Conso Conso config if Le Le Console config if Le Le config if capabilities 100full capabilities flowcontrol 3 119 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Creating Trunk Groups 3 120 You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual ageregate link A port tru
57. characters Max Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 10 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 163 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State W Enabled Spanning Tree Backup Root I Enabled Spanning Tree Type MSTP Default Priority Format 802 1 z Priority 0 61440 IEEE 802 1D format in unit of 1 32768 IEEE 802 11 format in units of 4096 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 le seconds Maximum Age 6 40 feo seconds Forward Delay 4 30 5 seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long Transmission Limit 1 10 fe MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers Configuration Digest AC36 177F50283C 04683821 DBAB26DE62 Region Revision 0 65535 0 Region Name oo 04 e263 16 co Max Hop Count 1 40 eo Figure 3 70 Configuring the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 164 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 4
58. eve e level ve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 25 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config 4 36 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands enable 4 25 authentication enable 4 99 IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed GC 4 37 management access show management Displays the switch to be monitored or PE 4 38 configured from a browser management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch thr
59. garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 252 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 252 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 251 Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 63 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets 4 254 queue weights and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3
60. i e switches are numbered downward in the stack starting with the Master as unit 1 and then select the appropriate unit number from the web or console management interface Selecting the Stack Master Note the following points about unit numbering The unit identification number can also be selected on the front panel graphic of the web interface or from the CLI e If the Master Slave button is pushed in on more than one switch or is not pressed on any switch the system will not be able to initialize the stack connections Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change When a link or unit in the stack fails a trap message is sent and a failure event is logged The stack will be rebooted after any system failure or topology change It takes two to three minutes to for the stack to reboot Also note that powering down a unit or inserting a new unit in the stack will cause the stack to reboot 2 5 INITLAL CONFIGURATION Resilient IP Interface for Management Access The stack functions as one integral system for management and configuration purposes You can therefore manage the stack through any port configured as part of the VLAN used for management access The Master unit does not even have to include an active port member in the management VLAN However if the unit to which you normally connect for management access fails and there are no active port members on the other units within this VLAN interface then this I
61. indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more Va R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R A ki D B Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port A x U Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e Admin Status Shows if this interface is enabled External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes preced
62. note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports SSH version 1 5 and 2 0 clients COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 15 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 47 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH GC 4 48 server ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a GC 4 49 authentication client retries ip ssh server key Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 50 size copy tftp Copies the uset s public key from a TFTP server PE 4 82 public key to the switch delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 50 ip ssh crypto Generates the host key PE 4 51 host key generate ip ssh crypto Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 52 zeroize ip ssh save Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 52 host key disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 23 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the PE 4 53 configured values for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 53 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for PE 4 55 the host show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and PE 4 80 public key type The SSH server on this switch supports both password and pu
63. option an SNMP user account will be automatically generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 3 48 2 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages 3 Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 67 4 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 61 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 3 48 2 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL 3 Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 67 4 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 61 5 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 3 54 6 Then configure a remote user page 3 58 Command
64. precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 14 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 3 Flash 6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0 Routine 3 209 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Precedence settings apply to all interfaces Web29 Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority Interface Select Port trunid1 IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS 1 IP Precedence 2 CoS 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Prece
65. specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port none Interface Port gt VLANID fz Ad E Multicast IP Remove a Port 1 z f Trunk I z Figure 3 104 Specifying Multicast Port Membership CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 12 4 270 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 272 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 0 0 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one of more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Serv
66. 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 9 gt Port STA State Priority MST Path Cost 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 1 Forwarding fie 200000 2 Discarding hae 200000 3 Discarding he 200000 4 50 5 2 Trunk Discarding 0 Discarding 128 00000 x Figure 3 75 MSTP Port Configuration CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 4 171 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 4 225 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 4 224 Console config if VLAN CONFIGURATION VLAN Configuration TEEE 802 1Q VLANs In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to
67. 1 64 characters notifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters Default Setting e Default groups public read only private2 read write e readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 e writeview Nothing is defined notifyview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration 27 No view is defined 28 Maps to the defaultview 4 164 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e A group sets the access policy for the assigned users When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command e When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption e For additional information on the notification messages supported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 3 62 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 4 159 Example Console config snmp server group r d v3 auth write daily Console config show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp group Group Name r d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Stor
68. 206 Console config spanning tree backup root 4 214 Console config spanning tree mode mstp 4 207 Console config spanning tree priority 40000 4 211 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 209 Console config spanning tree max age 38 4 210 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 4 208 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 212 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 5 4 213 Console config Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 214 Console config mstp revision 1 4 218 Console config mstp name R amp D 4 217 Console config mstp max hops 30 4 218 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface e STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA com
69. 21 SMTP Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 64 logging sendmail Severity threshold used to trigger alert GC 4 65 level messages logging sendmail Email address used for From field of alert GC 4 66 source email messages logging sendmail Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 67 destination email logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 67 show logging Displays SMTP event handler settings NE 4 68 sendmail PE logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host 7p_address ip_address YP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling 4 64 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and trie
70. 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 123 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protoco number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dsop source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask 4 125 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dsop source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag contro flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 dsqp DSCP priority level Range 0 63 sport Protocol gt source port number Range 0 65535 dport Protocol gt de
71. 3 154 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops N Designated 7N A Da a ee pa j Xoj X A x ae x Designated poet me a _ gt Designated Port x N _ Bridge J X Fi Wy y X Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Brid
72. 4096 802 1t format Options 802 1t 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 e Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 9 IEEE 802 1D priority format cannot be used for a switch that is a member of an MIST If you select 802 1D priority format for a bridge in this state the system will return an error message 3 162 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION e Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This
73. 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 Ifno explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 3 99 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name devid Type Standerd v Add Figure 3 42 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 4 123 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL 3 100 Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain any combination o
74. ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address e extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a tule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config tacacs list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 4 124 ip access group 4 134 show ip access list 4 128 4 123 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS access list ip extended fragment auto mask This command automatically creates extra masks to support fragmented ACL entries Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no access list ip extended fragment auto mask Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If this feature is disabled fragmented packets wi
75. Capabilities Broadcast storm Broadcast storm limit Flow control LACP Port security ax MAC count Port security action Current status Link status Port operation status Operation speed duplex Flow control type Information of VLAN 1 MAC address Console Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 100TX 00 01 F4 78 AE Cl Up Auto 10half Enabled 500 packets second Enabled Disabled Disabled 0 None 10full 100half 100full Up Up 100full None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 00 01 F4 78 AE CO show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 180 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 139 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable
76. Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Note For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased 3 77 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 4 82 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type Console reload
77. Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface 4 144 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config acces
78. Console config ip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name Ssample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 288 ip name server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address1 server address2 server address6 e server address1 IP address of domain name server e server address2 server address6 IP address of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 290 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Example This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displays the list Console config ip domain server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 1 012 0 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 288 ip domain lookup 4 291 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to
79. Console configure Console config COMMAND LINE INTERFACE To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Command Modes Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 13 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 119 Control access list ip extended Console config ext acl List access list ip mask precedence Console config ip mask acl access list mac Console config mac acl access list mac mask precedence Console config mac mask acl Interface interface ethernet port Console config if 4 170 port channel d vlan id VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 230 MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 214 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config 4 9 ENTERING COMMANDS Command Line Processing 4 10 Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by
80. Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 264 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 265 4 268 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 69 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or 4 269 static assignment sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast 4 273 filtering at Layer 2 Static Multicast Configures static multicast router ports 4 278 Routing IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 70 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 270 ip ig
81. Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 15 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 18 Setting the IP Address 1 0 cece eee eee 3 19 Manual Configuration 0 0 6 0 0 cee eee eee 3 21 Using DHCP BOOTP 0 0 c eee eee eee 3 22 Managing Firmwate inh nasi eaa cee eee 3 23 Downloading System Software from a Server 3 24 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 26 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3 28 Console Port Settings 0 cece eee eee 3 30 jLelnet Settings a Sy iah haat tae Gaetan Ae eee aes 3 33 Configuring Event Logging 1 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 35 System Log Configuration 0 000 eee eee eee 3 35 Remote Log Configuration 000 e eee eee 3 37 Displaying Log Messages 0 6 06 0 cece eee 3 39 Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts 3 40 Resetting the System 6 cece eee 3 42 Setting the System Clock 0 0 c cece eee eee 3 43 Configuring SNIP raaa aaa E A ee eee 3 43 Setting the Time Zone 1 6 eee eee 3 44 Simple Network Management Protocol 0000 ee eee 3 45 Enabling the SNMP Agent 0 cece eee eee 3 48 Setting Community Access Strings 00 00 c eee 3 48 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 50 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 004 3 53 Setting the Local Engine ID 00000000000 3 53 Spe
82. Eth 1 22 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Egress rate limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode Private VLAN mapping Console Priority for untagged traffic Private VLAN host association Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 22 Enabled 500 packets second Disabled disable 100M bits per second disable 100M bits per second Hybrid Disabled All frames a 0 Enabled 1 u NONE NONE NONE 4 182 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 47 show interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 177 LACP status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 190 Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 187 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 234 Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 236 Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 235 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 237 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority fo
83. Forward Delay sec 5 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Current root cost 0000 CIST path cost 0 Number of topology changes 2 Last topology changes time sec 303 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method Long root forwarding 200000 200000 128 0 128 10 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 disabled 1 enabled disabled auto point to point enabled 3 176 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 165 for additional information e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets e Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk 3 The following interface attributes can be configured MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default
84. Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 143 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Port 1 z C Trunk z Query
85. ID where the user resides page 4 160 Then configure a remote user page 4 167 e The switch can send SNMP version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications e Ifyou specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 inform retries 10 timeout 30 batman version 2c udp port 162 Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 159 4 158 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up d
86. Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Glossary 5 GLOSSARY Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic ke
87. Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with radius server green Server port number 49 Console Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message 4 107 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Table 4 33 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 108 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port ina VLAN GC 4 201 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding PE 4 202 database port security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum n
88. Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses 24 Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 3 230 CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply General Configuration Domain Lookup Status V Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk lt lt Add Domain Name sample com jp Name Server List Current New 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 _ Add_ Name Server A Remove Figure 3 105 Configuring DNS 3 231 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ip domain name sample com 4 288 Console config ip domain list sample com uk 4 289 Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 290 Console config ip domain lookup 4 291 Console show dns 4 293 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 1927 1658 1455 LOsse1 e08
89. Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 218 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 218 ANG SPANNING TREE COMMANDS revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 217 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 217 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops op number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spa
90. Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Backup Root Automatically lowers the switch s bridge priority by 4096 if it loses contact with the current root device To succeed the switch must have a direct connection to current root bridge and its adjusted bridge priority must be higher i e a numerically lower value than all the other bridges in the spanning tree Default Disabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode 3 161 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree EEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree EEE 802 1s Default Priority Format Sets the default spanning tree priority format 802 1D Specifies IEEE 802 1D priority format in increments of 1 802 1t Specifies IEEE 802 1t format in increments of 4096 e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 1 802 1D format or step of
91. State Collecting 2 Admin State Synchronization i opgenstste SSNCINONECAHION 4 Admin State Aggregation 2 Oper State Aggregation 2 Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity 2 Oper State LACP Activity v Figure 3 56 Displaying LACP Port Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 196 Channel group 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 3 10 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregat
92. The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count 4 274 This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping COMMAND LINE INTERFACE query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 276 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query i
93. This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config 4 213 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree backup root This command adjusts the bridge priority in an attempt to take over as the new root bridge if it loses contact with the original root device Use the no form to disable the command Syntax no spanning tree backup root Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command will automatically lower the bridge priority of this device by 4096 if the switch loses contact with the current root bridge For this command to succeed the switch must have a direct connection to current root bridge and its adjusted bridge priority must be higher i e a numerically lower value than all the other bridges in the spanning tree Example Console config spanning tree backup root Console config mstp spanning tree mst configuration 4 214 This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs ate mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands mst vlan 4 215 mst priority 4 216 name 4 217 revision 4 218 max hop
94. Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host ost_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config 4 105 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS tacacs setver port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs setver port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs setver key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 106 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server
95. an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Configuring User Accounts on page 3 70 2 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program 3 1 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 2 Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated If you log into the web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 169 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTEREACE Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the Web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When
96. based on an ACL rule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag To specify this priority use the set priority keywords The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service To specify the IP precedence priority use the set tos keywords To specify the DSCP priority use the set dscp keywords Note that the 4 137 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 Related Commands show marking 4 138 show marking This command displays the current configuration for packet marking Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show marking Interface ethernet 1 12 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console Related Commands match access list ip 4 137 MAC ACLs Table 4 38 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters GC 4 139 co
97. commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Glossary 7 GLOSSARY Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 8 Numerics 802 1X configure 3 88 4 110 port authentication 3 88 4 110 A Access Control Lists See ACL ACL configuration guidelines 3 98 4 119 Extended IP 3 99 4 120 4 122 4 125 MAC 3 99 4 120 4 138 4 142 Standard IP 3 99 4 120 4 122 4 124 address table 3 151 4 200 aging time 3 154 4 204 B BOOTP 3 22 4 280 BPDU 3 155 4 207 broadcast storm threshold 3 135 4 177 C Class of Service See CoS community string 2 11 3 48 4 154 configuration settings saving or restoring 3 26 4 82 console port required connect
98. config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 195 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sys id e port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 6 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages e internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side side neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote e sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example LACPDUs Sent Console show lacp 1 counters Channel group 1 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 0 Table 4 51 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group 4 196 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 51 show lacp counters display description Continued Field Description Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Number of frames received that
99. config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst nstance_id priority priority no mst stance_id priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance e Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 e Only priority increments of 4096 as specified in IEEE 802 1t are allowed for this command 4 216 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default
100. control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs Each ACL can have up to 32 rules e The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule ACCESS CONTROL LISTS When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Or BS Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports
101. control the supplied power Range 37 375 watts Default 375 Watts 3 147 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click PoE Power Config Specify the desired power budget for the switch Click Apply Power Configuration f f Power Allocation 37 375 375 watts Figure 3 63 Setting the Switch Power Budget CLI Use the power mainpowet maximum allocation command to set the PoE power budget for the switch Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 200 4 91 Console config Displaying Port Power Status 3 148 Use the Power Port Status page to display the current PoE power status for all ports Command Attributes Port The port number e Admin Status The administrative status of PoE power on the port e Mode The current operating status of PoE power on the port Power Allocation The configured power budget for the port Power Consumption The current power consumption on the port Priority The port s configured power priority setting PowseR OVER ETHERNET SETTINGS Web Click PoE Power Port Status Power Port Status P Power Allocation Power Consumption p Port Admin Status Mode milliwatts milliwatts Priority 1 Enabled off 15400 0 low 2 Enabled off 15400 0 low 3 Enabled of 15400 iy low 4 Enabled off 15400 0 low 5 Enabled off 15400 0 low x Figure
102. current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes e Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority the MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when spanning tree mode is set to MSTP page 3 160 and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system e Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION e Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to fo
103. delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST Region Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32
104. device Default Setting Flashes the LEDs for each unit in the stack Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console config light unit 5 Console config 4 33 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 13 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 151 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 110 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Privileged Exec level Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication GC 4 34 system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the GC 4 36 username 4 34 This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name e name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 e access level eve Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is requir
105. does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaultVian Disabled VLAN VLAN ID 1 4093 2 R amp D Enabled lt lt Add I VLAN Name Remove f i Status I Enable Figure 3 79 VLAN Static List Creating VLANs 3 187 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 230 Console config vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 231 Console config end Console show vlan 4 240 Vlan ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Ethl 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Ethl 5 Ss Eth1 ce Eth1 oe Ethl 8 S Ethl ah Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 s Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 s Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 26 Ss Vlan ID 2 Type Static Name R amp D Status Active Ports Port channel Console Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VL
106. followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active 4 231 VLAN COMMANDS Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage e no vlan v an id deletes the VLAN e no vlan v an id name removes the VLAN name no vlan v an id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 240 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 59 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode fora IC 4 233 specified VLAN switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an IC 4 234 interface switchpor Configures frame types to be accepted by an IC 4 235 acceptable frame types interface switchpor Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 236 ingress filtering switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an IC 4 237 interface switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an IC 4 238 interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interfac
107. for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 24 show users 4 80 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication bya single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and pass
108. from Memory to Flash Generate Clear Figure 3 34 SSH Host Key Settings USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 Console ip ssh save host key 4 52 Console show public key host 4 55 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584 65238779154647980739 6314033869257931051057652122430528078 6588548578 9272602 9378660892368 41423275912127603259196836970534393364384 4522 3335188287173896894511 729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwI qCqDb38 693 YVX1ME1SHLOEcCE Re6hlasf EthIwmj hLY400j qJZpcEQUgCf Y lum0Y2uoLka Py9ieGWO8 2 gobUZKIICukg6vj09Xx Ts7XKc05xfzkBikviDa 20rI z6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1nixYTVothSv8r0ea2rpnO6DkZA AAAFOCNZn x17dwpW8RrVDOnSWw4Qk 6QAAAIEApt kGeB6B5hwagH4gUocy6ilTmrms iJgfwO90qRPUMbCAkCCtuzxat0Oo7drnI ZypMx Sx5RUGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHeFY5ilc 31DCNBueeLykZzVS RSt azTKIk zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn Q7IphPqyJ309 MK8 LFD mJEAAACAL8A 6tESiswP20FqX7VGOEbzVDSOIRTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc 31MtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a f8TUAg PNWKV 6 WOhqmshQdo tVzDR1e XKNTZjO0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrb1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authenti
109. in erface interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on Ethernet port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 178 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status n erface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 e vlan v an id Range 1 4093 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 114 4 179 INTERFACE COMMANDS Example Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex
110. list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP e Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface 4 239 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 60 Displaying VLAN Information show 4 240 Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE 4 240 PE show interfaces status Displays status for the specified VLAN NE 4 179 vlan interface PE show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational NE 4 182 switchport status of an interface PE vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id v an id name vlan name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN
111. max mac count 20 config if Console Console Console Console 3 87 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 3 88 Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible a Authentication l E 1x Protocol over LANs client EAPOL to exchange Sere et authentication 1 Client attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information protocol messages 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server server lorwi c 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication
112. may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 221 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting e point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium 4 223 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree
113. means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac addtess table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Time in number of seconds 10 1000000 or 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds 4 203 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 300 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 56 Spanning Tree Commands Comman
114. memory flushed on power reset e evel One of the syslog severity levels listed in the following table Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Table 4 18 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting e Flash errors level 3 0 e RAM informational level 6 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 4 58 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command
115. mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst nstance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst ustance_id cost instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree e Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 4 224 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 225 spanning tre
116. not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members e Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 gt Up Time at Creation 0 dOhO min 28s Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Uniti Port10 z Figure 3 78 VLAN Current Table 3 185 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Attributes CLI e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes e Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members C
117. off accordingly Use the no form to turn off power for a port Syntax no power inline Default Setting Detection is enabled for PoE compliant devices Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage When detection is enabled for PoE compliant devices power is automatically supplied when a device is detected on the port providing that the power demanded does not exceed switch s power budget Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline auto Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if no power inline Console config if power inline maximum allocation This command limits the power allocated to specific ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power inline maximum allocation mi iwatts no power inline maximum allocation milliwatts The maximum power budget for the port Range 3000 15400 milliwatts Default Setting 15400 milliwatts 4 93 POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage If a device is connected to a switch port and the switch detects that it requires more than the maximum power allocated to the port no power is supplied to the device i e port power remains off Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline maximum allocation 8000 Console config if power inline priority
118. on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any adjacent multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Based on the group membership information learned from IGMP a router switch can determine which if any multicast traffic needs to be forwarded to each of its ports At Layer 3 multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note that IGMP neither alters nor routes IP multicast packets A multicast routing protocol must be used to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks Therefore when DVMRP or PIM routing is enabled for a subnet on this switch you also need to enable IGMP Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query page 3 222 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your
119. priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method e long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration 4 212 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 212 takes precedence over port priority page 4 221 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage
120. protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Power Over Ethernet Settings The SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE can provide DC power to a wide range of connected devices eliminating the need for an additional power source and cutting down on the amount of cables attached to each device Once configured to supply power an automatic detection process is initialized by the switch that is authenticated by a PoE signature from the connected device Detection and authentication prevent damage to non 802 3af compliant devices The switch s power management enables total switch power and individual port power to be cont
121. remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 50 and Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users on page 3 58 The engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action 2000000003000462b316 54321 192 168 1 19 Remove I _ Aad Figure 3 26 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 4 160 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 161 Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range
122. serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and GC 4 14 starts the line configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 15 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 16 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a login LC 4 17 response attempt exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter LC 4 18 waits until user input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which LC 4 19 limits the number of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console LC 4 20 is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are LC 4 20 interpreted and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 21 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 22 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per LC 4 23 byte disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 23 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE 4 24 PE These commands only apply to the serial port 4 13 LINE COMMANDS line 4 14 This command identifies a specific line
123. statistics for the selected 3 94 port ACL 3 98 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or 3 98 MAC addresses Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL rules are 3 107 checked Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 112 IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed 3 96 management access via the Web SNMP and Telnet Port 3 114 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 114 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 114 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 117 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 117 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 121 LACP 3 123 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 125 Aggregation Port Configures system priority admin key and 3 125 port priority Port Counters Displays statistics for LACP protocol 3 129 Information messages Port Internal Displays settings and operational state for 3 130 Information local side Port Neighbors Displays settings and operational state for 3 133 Information remote side NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 135 Mirror Port Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 136 Configuration Rate Limit 3 138 Inpu
124. status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Command Attributes Web e Name Interface label e Type Indicates the port type 1OOBASE TX 1000BASE GBIC 100BASE FX S 100BASE FX M 1000BASE T or SFP e Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled e Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member e Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 4 Port Information only 5 Trunk Information only 3 114 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Admin Oper Speed oe Paes Trunk PortName Type Status Status Duplex Control Autonegotiation Member Status Status 1 100Base TX Enabled Up 100fu None Enabled 2 100Base TX Enabled Up 100fu None Enabled 3 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 4 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 5 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 6 100Base Tx Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 7 100Base TX Enabled Dow
125. system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 13 System Information Provides basic system description including 3 13 contact information Switch Information Shows the number of ports hatdware 3 15 firmware version numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 18 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 19 File 3 23 Copy Enables the transfer and copying files 3 24 Delete Enables the deletion of files from flash 3 24 memory Set Startup Sets the startup files 3 24 Line 3 30 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 30 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 33 Log 3 35 Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 39 System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 35 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a 3 37 remote logging process SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a 3 40 participating server Reset Restarts the switch 3 42 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Menu Description Page SNTP 3 43 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including 3 43 broadcast mode or a spec
126. table on page 3 36 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Level 7 SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Log SMTP Enable SMTP specify a source email address and select the minimum severity level To add an IP address to the SMTP Server List type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages and click Apply SMTP Admin Status M Enabled Email Source Address Pig wheels matel com Severity 4 Warning x SMTP Server List New bated Eee SMTP Sener Remove d j Email Destination Address List New ee Email Destination Address Figure 3 18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 41 C
127. the CLI session enter Exit Console ENTERING COMMANDS Username guest Password system login password CLI session with the SMC6824M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password if so configured Console Configuration Commands 4 8 Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in nonvolatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include commands such as parity and databits e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands
128. the Trunk Membership menu see page 3 121 3 123 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 124 Command Attributes e Member List Current Shows configured trunks Unit Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Port Port identifier Range 1 26 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unit Port Unit Port Unit Port3 Unit Port4 sAd Unit f Unit Ports Remove Port 1 Unit Port _ Remove es Figure 3 53 LACP Port Configuration CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lacp Console config if exit 4 171 4 190 Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end PORT CONFIGURATION Console show interfaces Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type ac address Configuration ame Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Flow control Port security ax MAC count Current status Created by Link status Port operation status Flow control type ember Ports Ethl 1 Console
129. the remote logging process Default Disabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service 3 37 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 38 This attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See REC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List Web Click System Log Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status M Enabled Logging Faci
130. the specified unit number and file type e Tf the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 87 whichboot 4 88 4 89 POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS Power over Ethernet Commands The commands in this group control the power that can be delivered to attached PoE devices through the switch ports on the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE The switch s power management enables total switch power and individual port power to be controlled within a configured power budget Port power can be automatically turned on and off for connected devices and a per port power priority can be set so that the switch never exceeds its allocated power budget When a device is connected to a switch port its power requirements are detected by the switch before power is supplied If the power required by a device exceeds the power budget of the port or the whole switch power is not supplied Table 4 26 PoE Commands mainpower management for switch Command Group Function Mode Page power mainpower Sets the maximum power available to all GC 4 91 maximum allocation switch ports power inline Provides power to pre standard PoE devices GC 4 91 compatible power inline Turns power on and off for specific ports IC 4 93 power inline Sets the maximum power available to specific
131. time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 20 4 19 LINE COMMANDS silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 19 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character e 8 Eight data bits per character 4 20 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default
132. to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM 3 35 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 36 Command Attributes System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process e Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 err
133. to good Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 main power change to not east Log Messages Level Module 6 functions 1 error number Informaton Unit 1 Port 3 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information System coldStart notification Figure 3 17 Displaying Logs 3 39 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show logging flash 4 61 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts 3 40 To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled e Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see
134. to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 208 The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes e Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence e IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu then click Apply IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence v Figure 3 92 Setting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 4 262 Console config Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three
135. two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 129 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 130 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring an IP ACL Mask 3 108 This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to specify a host address not a subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any ACCESS CONTROL LISTS e Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 100 Protocol Bitmask Check the protocol field Service Type Mask Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS Source Destination Port Bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 Control Code Bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Web Configure the mas
136. unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console 4 266 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 261 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 262 show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 1 1 Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 262 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 263 4 267 PRIORITY COMMANDS show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6
137. user igmp snooping e vlan id VLAN ID 1 to 4093 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None 4 272 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Console IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Table 4 71 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Allows this device to act as the querier for GC 4 273 querier IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 274 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 275 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 276 query max response ti me ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 277 router port expire time ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier 4 273 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected
138. your Web browser connects with the switch s Web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics re unit TZ e Mode Active hd R H Linkup f Link Down S Home TigerStack Ill 10 100 6824M Managed 24 2 Stackable BE System aA SNTP Switch Manager O SNMP H Saas System Name a PoE Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 BG Address Table ro S Spanning Tree Location BOVAN B0 Priority Contact S IGMP Snooping System Up Time days O hours O minutes and 48 7 seconds BSNS Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technical support Connect to SMC Web Page Apply Revert Help Figure 3 1 Home Page Note The examples in this chapter are based on the SMC6824M There are no major differences between the SMC6824M SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE 3 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuration Options 3 4 Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the Web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Apply Sets specified v
139. 0 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password B 2 Contact SMC Technical Support for help USING SYSTEM LOGS Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps 1 Enable logging 2 Set the error messages reported to include all categories 3 Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages 4 Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error 5 Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed 6 Contact SMC Technical Support For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 B 3 TROUBLESHOOTING B 4 GLOSSARY Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Address Resolution Protocol ARP ARP converts between IP addresses and MAC i e hardware addresses ARP is used to locate the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address This allows the
140. 0 Disabled j Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 f8 0 Disabled l Figure 3 14 Configuring the Telnet Interface CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 4 14 Console config line login local 4 15 Console config line password 0 secret 4 16 Console config line timeout login response 300 4 17 Console config line exec timeout 0 4 18 Console config line password thresh 3 4 19 Console config line end Console show line 4 24 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 3 34 BASIC CONFIGURATION Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged
141. 00 4 280 DNS Commands soree aa CA ee ea die 4 286 Show DNS Output Description 008 4 294 Troubleshooting Chart 0 0 00 0 00 cee cece eee B 1 xxi TABLES xxii FIGURES Figute 3 1 Home Page ssssseceyurar eae ones seein saaeen 3 3 Figure 3 2 Front Panel Indicators 0 00 c cece ee eee 3 5 Figure 3 3 System Information 0 cece eee eee ee 3 14 Figure 3 4 General Switch Information 00008 3 17 Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration 3 19 Figure 3 6 IP Interface Configuration Manual 3 21 Figure 3 7 IP Interface Configuration DHCP 3 22 Figure 3 8 Copy Firmware 0000 06 cece eee 3 24 Figure 3 9 Setting the Startup Code 0 0 00 cee eee 3 25 Figure 3 10 Deleting Files 3 0 rioen nero Sones EEA A 2 3 25 Figure 3 11 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up 3 28 Figure 3 12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 3 29 Figure 3 13 Console Port Settings 0 e eee eee 3 32 Figure 3 14 Configuring the Telnet Interface 0 0 3 34 Figure 3 15 System Logs 2icec 2 eee ea eaten chee 3 37 Figure 3 16 Remote Logs 2 622 esocee eee ea eee ena ees 3 38 Figure 3 17 Displaying Logs 0 6 cece eee 3 39 Figure 3 18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 41 Figure 3 19 Resetting the Switch 0 eee cece 3 42 Figure 3 20 SNTP Configuration
142. 00 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps Range Fast Ethernet 1 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1 1000 Mbps Web Click Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 M Enabled l eo aa 2 I Enabled ho 3 I Enabled 100 4 I Enabled ho 5 I Enabled 00 E Figure 3 60 Configuring Input Port Rate Limiting PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 60 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if rate limit input 60 4 187 Console config if rate limit output 60 4 187 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values dis
143. 00 ee 4 194 licp port prioty aies tei ee Me a ee be 4 195 show NaC p krea saa a E iene ie Each Se nl A 4 196 Address Table Commands 6 0 6 00 c ec e eee eee 4 200 mac address table static 6 6 cee cece eee 4 201 clear mac address table dynamic 000000000 4 202 show mac addtess table 0 cee eee eee 4 202 mac address table aging time 0 6 eee eee 4 203 show mac address table aging time 000000008 4 204 Spanning Tree Commands 0 eee eee 4 204 Spanning ee o aree A a E hank ie OPN Oh Reade 4 206 spanning tree Mode serijai i ra Pak eee eee 4 207 spanning tree forwatd time 6 cece eee eee 4 208 spanning tree hello time 0 eee eee 4 209 spamning tree Max age 6 eee eee 4 210 spanning tree default priority 6 cee eee 4 211 spanning tree priority 6 eee 4 211 spanning tree pathcost method 0 00 eee eee 4 212 xiii T4BLE OF CONTENTS xiv spanning tree transmission limit 00 e ee eee 4 213 spanning tree backup root 6 6 eee eee 4 214 spanning tree mst configuration 6 00 eee eee eee 4 214 stylat esis ashen puted Aaya PRISE e aa e a Ea lee 4 215 MSt PHOLity tx ota aia SRA ae a a ae 8 4 216 MATE Se Sava GA SPs tached ST iaY ote noe SOM a tae Sadie A BA 4 217 POVASION NA ts Sach E te a a aa E a ances ae ote eats ies AC 4 218 max Nops Esta she Wars waste a AE Sa ea td eas A 4 218 spanning tree spanning disabled
144. 1 Static Console 4 279 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Table 4 73 IP Interface Command Syntax Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 280 ip Defines the default gateway through whichan GC 4 282 default gateway in band management station can reach this device ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DCHP client request PE 4 282 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 283 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this PE 4 284 device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another NE 4 284 node on the network PE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address ip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for r
145. 15 Console config if ip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch config access list ip extended 6 Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console sh access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if tend Console show access list IP extended access
146. 196 Channel group 2 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Sent 307 LACPDUs Receive 296 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Console Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 3 9 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group 3 130 PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 9 LACP Internal Configuration Information Continued Field Description Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the
147. 1p Priority check box and enter a priority Then click Add ACL Marker ACL Marker Configure Precedence 0 7 802 1p Por Name Type SCP 0 63 Priority 0 7 Mape ar Pemai r E ACL Marker Mapping Type Precedence DSCP Port Name 802 1p Priority 1 oi iP osce b jo Remove 1 mike maco o o Remove Figure 3 99 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules CLI This example changes the DSCP priority for packets matching an IP ACL rule and the 802 1p priority for packets matching a MAC ACL tule Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 4 137 Console config if match access list mac mike set priority 0 4 149 Console config if end Console show marking 4 138 Interface ethernet 1 1 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console 3 219 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time 7N Unicast applications such as videoconferencing poe ON or streaming audio A multicast server i a does not have to establish a separate C C connection with each client It merely broadcasts its service to the network and N CN EN EN any hosts that want to receive the e So Ne multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although this m N Saas approach reduces the network overhead a required b
148. 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config std acl Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes 3 104 Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination Bitmask Hexadecimal mask for source or destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4093 VID Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Ethernet Type Bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex e Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet IT packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet I packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination ma
149. 3 64 Displaying Port PoE Status CLI This example displays the PoE status and priority of port 1 Console show power inline status 4 95 Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 2 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 3 enable on 5400 7505 Low Eth 4 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 5 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 6 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 7 enable on 5400 8597 Low Eth 23 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 24 enable off 5400 0 Low Console Configuring Port PoE Power If a device is connected to a switch port and the switch detects that it requires more than the power budget of the port no power is supplied to the device i e port power remains off If the power demand from devices connected to switch ports exceeds the power budget set for the switch the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied power For example e If a device is connected to a low priority port and causes the switch to exceed its budget port power is not turned on 3 149 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e Ifa device is connected to a critical or high priority port and causes the switch to exceed its budget port power is turned on but the switch drops power to one or more lower priority ports Note Power is dropped from low priority ports in sequence starting from port number 1 Command Attributes e Port The port number on the switch e Admin Status Enables PoE power on the port Power is auto
150. 4 113 port dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 114 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4 114 dot1x timeout Sets the time that a switch port waits after IC 4 115 quiet period the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout Sets the time period after which a IC 4 115 re authperiod connected client must be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an IC 4 116 authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 116 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx system auth control This command enables IEEE 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dotlx system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx system auth control Console config dot1ix default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx default Console config dotlx max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Sy
151. 5 5 Console Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 232 You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage e Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network e Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE e Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias r5 ho1 o55 6 Npeleiul Ed 192 168 1 55 Dette Eat Clear Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1 IP Address 2 IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Ad
152. 535 0 65535 1 B f bzs 2B she pzs 3lBb f 2768 alB f pzs slb h seve elb h pzs 7 B f pzs s fB feo B2768 alh fa 512 Figure 3 54 LACP Aggregation Port Configuration 3 127 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 128 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 6 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 and 6 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 192 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 4 192 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 192 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console sh lacp sysid 4 196 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 3 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 4 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 5 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 6 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 196 Channel group 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activ
153. 61 2 8875 7887 Fax 61 2 8875 7777 India 91 22 696 2790 Fax 91 22 696 2794 Middle East 97 14 299 4466 Fax 97 14 299 4664 Thailand 66 2 651 8733 Fax 66 2 651 8737 If you are looking for further contact information please visit www smc com www smc europe com or Www smc asia com SMC Networks Model Numbers SMC6824M F2 4 2 13 38 Tesla SMC6824MPE F 2 4 2 11 Irvine CA 92618 SMC6826MPE F2 4 2 11 Phone 949 679 8000 Pub Number 150200037700A E062005 R02
154. 68 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 53 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user System ID Partner Oper System LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol ID Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the Port Number protocol Partner Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by Port Number the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 4 199 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS C
155. 7 Eth 1 7 Gvrp configuration Disabled Console garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall smer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall join leave leaveall Which timer to set timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leavall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed 4 251 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if
156. 7 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 8 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E26316C0 1288 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 9 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0004E268316C0 1289 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 10 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128 10 Point to Point Enabled Disabled zj Figure 3 71 STA Port Information SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows general STA configuration and attributes for port 5 Eth 1 5 information Admin status Role State External path cost Internal path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 disable discarding 200000 200000 128 200000 128 5 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 32768 0 0004E2B316C0 enabled 0 enabled enabled auto point to point enabled Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can supp
157. 72 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count O Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Query time out 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch 3 224 MULTICAST FILTERING Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 71 gt Multicast Router Lis Uniti Portl1 Static Figure 3 101 Mapping Multicast Switch Ports to VLANs CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp
158. 8022737087794545 24083971752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4 34 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921 143173880 05553616163105177594083868631 109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 696317813662774141 689851320491 17204830339254324101637997592371449011938 00609025394840848271781943722884025331 159521348610229029789827213532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the swit
159. 88 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 4 289 ip name server 4 290 ip domain lookup 4 291 ip domain list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Domain names ate added to the end of the list one at a time e When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch it will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match 4 289 DNS COMMANDS e If there is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Console config ip domain list sample com jp
160. AADO 128 10 Point to Point Disabled Root 2 Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128 2 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128 3 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128 4 _ Point to Point Enabled Disabled 5 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128 5 Point to Point Enabled Disabled x Figure 3 74 MSTP Port Information 3 175 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 156 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Designated Root Current root port Eth 1 1 information Admin status Role State External path cost Internal path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console show spanning tree mst 0 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled Spanning tree backup root disabled Instance 0 VLANs configuration 2 4093 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 5 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root
161. AN 1 so a management station can be connected to any port on the switch However if other VLANs are configured and you change the Management VLAN you may lose management access to the switch In this case you should reconnect the management station to a port that is a member of the Management VLAN IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The MAC address of this switch Restart DHCP Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server BASIC CONFIGURATION Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address
162. AN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN awate devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 190 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 191 3 188 VLAN CONFIGURATION Command Attributes e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN ot CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag an
163. AN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 62 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4 249 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension PE 4 249 configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 250 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 239 interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for NE 4 250 selected interface PE garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected IC 4 251 function show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected NE 4 252 function PE 4 248 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext This comman
164. Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages Trap Manager Community String Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page for Version 1 or 2c clients or define a corresponding User Name in the SNMPv3 Users page for Version 3 clients Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager Trap Version Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Trap Security Level When trap version 3 is selected you must specify one of the following security levels Default noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Trap Inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used
165. Benes AS 4 59 ISS OIG Ap 2p Moke hese eRe ent ca Adie ea had 4 60 cleat lom ss het neh Mice a aa E Aida AAE ak 4 61 show logging sre aAa olen AER EENS AS 4 61 Show lo setae ran un a a e Ra OG 4 63 SMTP Alert Commands 6 cee 4 64 logging sendmail host 00 eee eee 4 64 logging sendmail level 0 0 cece eee ee 4 65 logging sendmail source email 0000000 4 66 logging sendmail destination email 0 4 67 ix T4BLE OF CONTENTS logging sendmail eop iA Melgar aaa aie 4 67 show logging sendmail 6 cee eee eee 4 68 Time Commands osn es t tld ena le ea 23 4 68 Sntpichent ia sits e oE eae etal Seah ees 4 69 SHEP SERV Cl EE ihe Atte pot heat eed Ate ASS 4 70 Step Poll sie e ae SS oli IA hE alae Set 4 71 SHOW SMt ps tibiae ty A e E soa a AERE dost 4 72 clock HIME ZONE pis ens ese ik Ae a Can ee ah Bas 4 73 calendar set santas A Ste ie tant oa ER 4 74 show calendar s erda Ba aAa T sus cease Ge bl ab og 1 4 74 System Status Commands 0 0 00 c ee eee ee eee 4 75 show startup config 2 6 6 eee eee 4 75 show rtunning config 6 6 eee ee eee 4 77 SHOW Syste tie nic BAe tbh peace eae bh sue wane ph 4 79 SHOW USELS ga inara obese So eae iE BO a EE ae 4 80 SHOW VETSION Gis Rea EG sen aa Be hens ee a A 4 80 Flash File Commands 0 0 ccc e cece cee eee eee e eee 4 81 COPY S54 singh eel i DOU ae ase dae Oh dite tiie oe dust odes ns 4 82 deletenscri ana t E a E b
166. COMO Code Remove _ Meek Pon Bitmask Bitmask 98 Bimask Poma 07 10 ps5 255 255 255 any Jany Any fany any b A lany lany lany Ary lany Remove a Porra E 168 10 265 255 255 255 Any lany Jany Any pn 3 fany lany 80 p5 Any lany _Femove paten Perma 3 z Adsress Typo Any Source Subnet Mask foso Destination Address Type Any Destination P Address Destination Subnet Mask Samice Type Tos 0 16 Precedence D3 oScP 064 Protecet CEPE CUDP 7 C Others Source Port 66595 Source Poet Bitmatk 065535 Destination Pon 55535 Destination Pon Bamask 0 65535 l omrol Code 0 63 Contret Code Bemask 0 63 cass Figure 3 44 Configuring Extended IP ACLs 3 103 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 124 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255
167. Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Glossary 4 GLOSSARY Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Multicast Switching A process whereby the SMC6824MPE switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wite or radio Out of Band Management
168. DSA Version2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair Le public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair 3 81 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 82 Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page e Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile memory Flash Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key Iosaj Host Key Type Both F Save Host Key
169. Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Ifthe file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted A colon is required after the specified unit number Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 87 delete public key 4 50 4 86 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir unit boot rom config opcode fi ename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown e unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files A colon is required after the specified unit number e File information is shown below Table 4 25 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is
170. Designated bridge 32768 0 0004E2B316C0 Fast forwarding enabled Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enabled Oper edge port enabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information Configuration name R amp D Revision level 0 Instance Vlans Console 4 229 VLAN COMMANDS VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and 4 230 state Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including 4 232 Interfaces ingress and egress tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and 4 240 Information MAC addresses Configuring Private Configures private VLANs port mode and 4 241 VLANs prtimary secondary associations Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 58 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add GC 4 230 change and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name VC 4 231 A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to crea
171. Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the CLI prompt GC 4 32 hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 33 snmp server Sets the system contact string GC 4 154 contact snmp server Sets the system location string GC 4 155 location light unit Displays the switch s unit ID using its NE 4 33 front panel LEDs PE prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to revert to the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the command prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config 4 32 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config light unit This command displays the stack unit ID using the switch s front panel LEDs Syntax light unit nz unit Specifies a stack unit on which to light the front panel LEDs The LEDs on the first unit number of ports will flash where unit is the stack identifier for the specified
172. E CONFIGURATION Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Port Priority Configuration Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 4 ajajaja FAAEE Figure 3 88 Configuring Class of Service per Port CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config if end Information of Eth 1 5 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Egress rate limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode Private VLAN mapping Console Console sh interfaces switchport ethernet 1 5 Priority for untagged traffic Private VLAN host association Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 255 4 182 Enabled Disabled disable 100M bits per second disable 100M bits per second Hybrid Disabled All frames 1 5 Enabled 1 u 500 packets second NONE NONE NONE 3 203 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port with service schedules based on Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to 8 separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The
173. Features BOOTP client CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS HTTP SSL SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band A 2 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS SNMPv3 Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 2002 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation Control Protocol Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3af 2003 Power over Ethernet PoE DHCP RFC 1541 HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON REC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP REC 1157 SNMPv2c RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC RAFT 3414 2570 2273 3411 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 30 SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE only A 3 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Management Information Bases A 4 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like M
174. IB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMP Framework MIB RFC 3411 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3412 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 SNMP Community MIB RFC 2576 TACACS Authentication Client MIB RFC TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser ot SNMP software B 1 Be sure the switch is powered up e Check network cabling between the management station and the switch e Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the s
175. LI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 240 Vian ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Ethl 1 S Ethl 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1l 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 ae Eth1 ae Ethl 8 S Ethl an Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 s beh 1618 Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 26 Ss Console Creating VLANs 3 186 Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag VLAN CONFIGURATION VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e
176. Mode Global Configuration Command Usage By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility Ape type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 59 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config logging trap 4 60 This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap vel no logging trap level One of the syslog severity levels Messages sent include the selecte
177. Mode to Static Enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode Static z IP Address fiszi6a154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 IP Interface Configuration Manual CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 171 Console config if ip address 10 2 13 30 255 255 255 0 4 280 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 2 13 254 4 282 Console config 3 21 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address 92168154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 MAC Address 00 30 F1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 IP Interface Configuration DHCP Note If you lose your management c
178. NS Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS HTTP SSL SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC up to 32 lists PoE Power over Ethernet DHCP Client Port Configuration 100BASE TX 10 100 Mbps half full duplex 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Optional module SFP 100BASE FX 100 Mbps full duplex Optional module SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input limit Output limit Range configured per port 29 SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE only A 1 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Port IP Precedence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional
179. NTERFACE configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 29 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands 4 27 GENERAL COMMANDS Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Con
180. ONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message and specify the switch source and up to five recipient destination email addresses Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 4 64 Console config logging sendmail level 3 4 65 Console config logging sendmail source email big wheels matel com 4 66 Console config logging sendmail destination email chris this company com 4 67 Console config logging sendmail 4 67 Console config exit Console show logging sendmail 4 68 SMTP servers 1 92 168 1 4 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 chris matel com SMTP source email address big wheels matel com SMTP status Enabled Console Resetting the System Web Select System Reset to reboot the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset Figure 3 19 Resetting the Switch 3 42 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Use the reload command to reboot the system Console reload 4 28 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y Note When restarting the system it always runs the Power On Self Test Setting the System Clock Simple Network Tim
181. P VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 1 7 Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 1 0030F1D47340 Bridge ID 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 7 Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay 115 g Last Topology Change 0 dOhOmin1s Priority 0 61440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance VLAN 1 Remove MST ID 0 4094 VLAN ID Add Figure 3 73 MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 173 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 1 4 227 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled Instance 1 VLANs configuration 1 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec ES Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Current root port 7 Current root cost 10000 CIST path cost 0 Number of topology changes 2 Last topology changes time sec 85 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 7 information Admin stat
182. P address will no longer be available To retain a constant IP address for management access across fail over events you should include port members on several units within the VLAN used for stack management Basic Configuration Console Connection 2 6 The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 At the Username prompt enter admin 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen BASIC CONFIGURATION 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwo
183. P on the switch Web Click SNMP Agent Status Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox and click Apply SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status Enabled Figure 3 22 Enabling the SNMP Agent CLI The following example enables SNMP on the switch Console config snmp server 4 152 Console config Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability The switch supports up to five community strings e Current Displays a list of the community strings currently configured Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only access private read write access Range 1 32 characters case sensitive 3 48 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL e Access Mode Specifies the access rights for the community string Read Only Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the acce
184. S PCI Device Test 40 0s sees ees PASS Switch Int Loopback test PASS Done All Pass Console Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in ports e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board 3 15 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 16 Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave Expansion Slots Expansion Slot 1 2 Stacking module or SMC6824M Optional modules 1000BASE T 1000BASE XGBIC 100BASE FX multimode or single mode SMC6824MPE Combination 1000BASE T SFP ports SMC6826MPE Combination 1000BASE T SFP ports These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI e Unit ID Unit number in stack Module Type A B Stacking module or SMC6824M Optional modules 1000BASE T 1000BASE XGBIC 100BASE FX multimode or single mode SMC6824MPE Combination 1000BASE T SFP po
185. S encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server USER AUTHENTICATION e You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes e Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed b
186. SHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac shal aes192 cbc hmac shal aes256 cbc hmac shal 3des cbc hmac shal blowfish cbc hmac shal aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cipher block chaining shal Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the firs
187. SNMP communications NE 4 153 PE snmp server Sets up the community access string to permit GC 4 154 community access to SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 154 4 151 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 41 SNMP Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 155 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP GC 4 156 notification operation snmp server enable Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e GC 4 159 traps SNMP notifications snmp server Sets the SNMPv3 engine ID GC 4 160 engine id show snmp engine id Shows the SNMPv3 engine ID PE 4 161 snmp server view Adds an SNMPv3 view GC 4 162 show snmp view Shows the SNMPv3 views PE 4 163 snmp server group Adds an SNMPv3 group mapping users to GC 4 164 views show snmp group Shows the SNMPv3 groups PE 4 165 snmp setver user Adds a user to an SNMPv3 group GC 4 167 show snmp user Shows the SNMPv3 users PE 4 169 snmp server clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management Console config snmp server Console config 4 152 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show snmp This command can be used to check the s
188. SS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC price list Under the limited lifetime warranty internal and external power supplies fans and cables are covered by a standard one year warranty from date of purchase SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 TABLE OF CONTENTS I trod ction ices a Ris CRON Ves ERNE 1 1 Key Features to jo nn asst ae el boa ete Pace ea be een 1 1 Description of Software Features 21 0 cee eee ee 1 2 System Defaults vnm giatu Rissa hast fouls Anda nue Soars hA a Meds haD 1 7 Initial Configuration 0 6 0 cece eee eee 2 1 Connecting tothe Switch sesse ia ie inch ea te A R 2 1 Configuration Options 6 ccc eee 2 1 Required Connections 2 0 0 0 cece ce eee eee 2 3 Remote GonnectOns jis ee is Wea ase DA re oe 2 4 Stack Ope
189. Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 21 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity e even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration 4 21 LINE COMMANDS Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed 4 22 This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed ps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set t
190. Stack and TigerSwitch are trademarks of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Statement SMC Networks Inc SMC warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the applicable warranty term All SMC products carry a standard 90 day limited warranty from the date of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller SMC may at its own discretion repair or replace any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product during the applicable warranty term SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime warranty by registering new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller Registration can be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty The Limited Lifetime warranty covers a product during the Life of that Product which is defined as the period of time during which the product is an Active SMC product A product is considered to be Active while it is listed on the current SMC price list As new technologies emerge older technologies become obsolete and SMC w
191. TRODUCTION 1 6 for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required
192. They include a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by these switches However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment The 24 10 100 Mbps ports on the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE also support the IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE standard that enables DC power to be supplied to attached devices over the unused pairs of wires in the connecting Ethernet cable Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Power over Ethernet Powers attached devices using IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS HTTP SSL Telnet SSH SNMP v1 2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs 1 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description DHCP Client Supported Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports port tr
193. This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate raz no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Enabled for all ports e Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped e This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if 4 177 INTERFACE COMMANDS clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters
194. This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 220 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port 4 221 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA relat
195. This command sets the power priority for specific ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power inline priority priority no power inline priority priority The power priority for the port Options 1 critical 2 high or 3 ow Default Setting 3 low Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage Ifthe power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to control the supplied power For example A device connected to a low priority port that causes the switch to exceed its budget is not supplied power A device connected to a critical or high priority port that causes the switch to exceed its budget is supplied power but the switch drops power to one or more lowet priority ports 4 94 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Power is dropped from low priority ports in sequence starting from port number 1 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline priority 2 Console config if Related Commands power mainpower maximum allocation 4 91 show power inline status This command displays the current power status for all ports or for specific ports Syntax show power inline status nterface interface ethernet unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show power inline
196. This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes 3 53 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMP v3 Engine ID Engine ID 800000340300301 b0e7a00000 Default Save Figure 3 25 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id local 12345abcdef 4 160 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 161 Local SNMP engineID 12345abcdef000000000000000 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console Specifying a Remote Engine ID 3 54 To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the
197. TigerStack II 10 100 24 Port Fast Ethernet Switch 9666 HH HH HHO R G 24 auto MDI MDI X 1OBASE T 100BASE TX ports 1O0OBASE T 100BASE TX ports support PoE capabilities 2 Gigabit combo ports RJ 45 SFP 8 8 Gbps of aggregate bandwidth Stacks up to 8 units Non blocking switching architecture Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MSTP Up to six LACP or static 4 port trunks RADIUS and TACACS authentication Rate limiting for bandwidth management CoS support for four level priority Full support for VLANs with GVRP IP Multicasting with IGMP Snooping Manageable via console Web SNMP RMON Management Guide SMC6824M SMC6824MPE SMC6826MPE Networks TigerStack III 10 100 Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949 679 8000 June 2005 Pub 150200037700A Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2005 by SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EZ Switch Tiger
198. Tx EAP Reg Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 40 Displaying 802 1X Statistics CLI This example displays the 802 1X statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 116 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrce ul 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console 3 95 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3 96 You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP addresses can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering add
199. VLAN CONFIGURATION VLAN and with their designated promiscuous ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Each private VLAN consists of two components a primary VLAN and one of more community VLANs A primary VLAN allows traffic to pass between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports subordinate to the primary VLAN A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from the community ports to their associated promiscuous ports Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch and multiple community VLANs can be configured within each primary VLAN To configure private VLANs follow these steps 1 Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu page 3 197 to designate one of more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups 2 Use the Private VLAN Association menu page 3 198 to map the secondary i e community VLAN s to the primary VLAN 3 Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu page 3 200 to set the port type to promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host i e having access restricted to community VLAN members and channeling all other traffic through a promiscuous port Then assign any promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a secondary VLAN i e community VLAN Displaying Current Private VLANs The Private VLAN Informat
200. ability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access tights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessaty VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
201. able 3 Table 3 Table 3 Table 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Table 4 Wey Peatures osc ces vies ao es bates eee vane ewe S 1 1 System Defaults aeria ia hte Marea a she ee dea 1 7 Web Page Configuration Buttons 000 3 4 Switch Main Menu eee eee eee ee eee 3 6 Logging Levels este orars ee yee red eS eee pott 3 36 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels 3 47 Supported Notification Messages 0005 3 62 HTTPS Suppott 5 ccna vie cates bane 3 76 802 1X Statistics 2 5 occ v eee eee eed eee teas 3 94 LACP Pott Counters e eios mai a dae vei 3 129 LACP Internal Configuration Information 3 130 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information 3 133 Pott Statisti s eir pios geenen otg AEE sea ae eek se 3 139 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 204 CoS Priority Levels 0 6b ate es eee be eee eet 3 204 Mapping IP Precedence 000 e cece 3 209 Mapping DSCP Priority 0 00 eee eee 3 211 CoS to ACL Mapping serate aosan e en eee eee 3 216 Command Modes i eee ee die ge eae 4 7 Configuration Command Modes s sasaa senso 4 9 Keystroke Commands 0 0 00 cece eee 4 10 Command Group Index 0000 ee eee eee 4 11 Line Commands sses re yesrent cet eee es 4 13 Gen
202. abled Disabled Disabled 0 None 10full 100half Up Up 100full None 4 179 100full Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes e Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters e Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons e Speed Duplex Allows manual selection of port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled e Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control e Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify 3 117 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operat
203. absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be ageregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 131 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 132 Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Interface Port e z Trunk ID 1 32768 LACP Pon i ir 3 Oper Key LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted 2 Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing _ Oper State Distributing 2 Admin State Collecting Oper
204. access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters 4 154 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 155 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location ext no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config
205. aces Displays the administrative and operational NE 4 182 switchport status of an interface PE 4 170 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 e vlan v an id Range 1 4093 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the port 25 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description sing no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters 4 171 INTERFACE COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 25 Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full
206. address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e At least one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS Ifall name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled 4 291 DNS COMMANDS show 4 292 Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config ip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name Ssample com Domain Name List sample com jp Ssample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1255 1041 20 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 288 ip name server 4 290 hosts This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address LOO 55 192 F685 1 655 Alias 1 rd6 Console COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 ENOM RN ngiha Console show d
207. affic CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 278 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 279 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console config Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 226 You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast IP address Command Attribute VLAN ID Selects the VLAN in which to display port members e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service MULTICAST FILTERING e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID ly Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Unit Port User Figure 3 103 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically
208. age Type nonvolatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model vl Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active 4 165 SNMP COMMANDS Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model vl Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 4 44 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated read view writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry 4 166 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE snmp server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read and a Write View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user username groupname remote ip address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp setver user username v1 v2c v3 re
209. all our toll free customer support number at 800 762 4968 Customers are responsible for all shipping charges from their facility to SMC SMC is responsible for return shipping charges from SMC to customer LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION AT SMC S OPTION THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS SMC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE LOSS OF BUSINE
210. alues of the actor s state parameters Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors Partner Admin System ID 327
211. alues to the system Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply or Apply Changes Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTEREACE Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 117 SMC6824M Unit 1 Mode Active Link Up Link Down SMC6824MPE Sule Unit fi gt ST CEE sare KEE _ j C E Mode Active Link Up I Link Down SMC6826MPE PT Ty Boo a Unit fi MCB826M ae Sorron foo Mode Active x I Link Up I Link Down Figure 3 2 Front Panel Indicators 3 5 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Main Menu 3 6 Using the onboard Web agent you can define
212. ame of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 124 ip access group 4 134 4 128 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list ip mask precedence This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 130 ip access group 4 134 4 129 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mask IP ACL This command defines a m
213. ame type RFC 1060 The following restrictions apply to ACLs This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User define
214. and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 4 x or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 6 HTTPS Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 77 Command Attributes e HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status M Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 ja Figure 3 33 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 41 Console config ip http secure port 441 4 42 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site
215. and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP 4 260 tags to class of service values 4 253 PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 64 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or GC 4 254 Weighted Round Robin WRR queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority GC 4 255 queues switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged IC 4 255 default frames queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority IC 4 257 queues show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 259 show queue Shows round robin weights assigned to the PE 4 259 bandwidth priority queues show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 260 show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational PE 4 182 switchport status of an interface queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues wrt Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 4 16 and 64 for queues 0 3 resp
216. andard A2 4 123 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 4 124 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 129 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 130 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 3 110 This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Command Attributes Source Destination Address Type Use Any to match any address Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination Bitmask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Packet Format Mask A packet format must be specified in the rule ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Ma
217. annel channe id Range 1 6 Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 226 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree n erface mst instance_id interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 e instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree 4 227 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS e Use the show spanning tree i erface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree
218. ase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 6 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad f
219. ask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask protocol any host sowrce bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmask destination port port bitmask control flag lag bitmask protocol Check the protocol field any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork e source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e precedence Check the IP precedence field e tos Check the TOS field e dscp Check the DSCP field e soutce port Check the protocol source port field e destination port Check the protocol destination port field e port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode IP Mask Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is 4 130 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress mask
220. at the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus 3 63 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 64 Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label authenticationFailure RMON Events V2 Object ID 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 Description AnauthenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTra ps object indicates whether this trap will be generated risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an a
221. ate rw 1 username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7alf 783eddf 27d254ca 1 logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 vlan database VLAN 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 spanning tree MST configuration 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged _Switchport native vlan 1 interface ethernet 2 26 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 1 interface VLAN 1 1 no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP 1 line console silent time 0 l line VTY 1 end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 75 4 78 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 13 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates PAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System description TigerStack III 10 100 6824M Managed 24 2 Stackable Switch SW version V2 4 2 13 System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 System information System Up time 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes and 25 59 secon
222. ation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 2 enabled Single Host Auto 1 25 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 26 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Disable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 50 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier i Authenticator State Machine State Reauth Count Backend State Machine State Request Count Identifier Server Authenticated 0 Idle 0 6 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 26 Console 4 116 yes yes n a n a 3 93 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying 802 1X Statistics 3 94 This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 7 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EXPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type
223. ation that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance CIST path cost The CIST path cost from this bridge to the regional root Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Disabled Designated Root 32768 00E0DEADBEOO Bridge ID 32768 00E0DEADBEUO Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost lo Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 0 N Forward Delay h15 _ Last Topology Change 0 d 4h34 min 58s Figure 3 69 Displaying the Spanning Tree Algorithm CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enabled disabled Spanning tree backup root Instance VLANs configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec
224. atus Enable or disable GVRP and click Apply GVRP Status GVRP M Enable Figure 3 76 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 249 Console config 3 183 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes e VLAN Version Number 4 The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch e Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number i Maximum VLAN ID 4093 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 77 Displaying Basic VLAN information CLI Enter the following command Console sh bridge ext 4 249 Max support VLAN numbers 255 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console 14 Web Only 3 184 VLAN CONFIGURATION Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or
225. ault None Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud Auto Default Auto Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local 1 CLI only 3 31 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 P secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 0 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 P secs 0 Disabled Data Bits fz Parity None z Speed awo z Stop Bits fis Figure 3 13 Console Port Settings CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current
226. ault Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 139 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a tule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 140 mac access group 4 146 show mac access list 4 142 permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet IT packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask 4 140 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE no permit deny untagged
227. been configured click Apply Private VLAN Port Configuration Port PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Trunk 4 Host i Ez fe z 5 ros I A ea 7 Figure 3 87 Configuring Private VLAN Ports CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport mode private vlan promiscuous 4 245 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 5 4 246 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host 4 245 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 4 246 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 Console config if 3 201 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue wi
228. behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage e GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network 3 191 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 192 e GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you ate experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes e PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how
229. blic key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 98 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the 4 45 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 4 46 switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 5194174677298486546861571773939016477935594230357741309
230. c unknown packets 3 105 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 106 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexadecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name bob Source MAC Source Destination MAC Destination VID Ethernet Ethernet Type Packet Action Address Bitmask Address itm MD Bimask Typo Bitmask Format Remove Permit Any Any 100 60 29 94 34 de ERREN Any Any 2048 E5535 Any Remove Action Permit Source Address Type Any Source MAC Address Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any Destination MAC Address Destination Bitmask MID VID Bitmask Ethemet Type Ethemet Type Biamask Packet Format Any z Aas Figure 3 45 Configuring MAC ACLs CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 4 140 Console config mac acl ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Configuring ACL Masks You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass f
231. cation Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients e SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 3 83 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status Enabled z Version ko SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 100 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 5 SSH Server Key Size 612 896 512
232. ce map PE 4 267 precedence show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 268 show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for PE 4 136 ip an interface show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for PE 4 148 mac an interface map ip port Global Configuration This command enables IP port mapping ie class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config 4 261 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip port Interface Configuration This command sets IP port priority i e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Exampl
233. ces using IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing Configure up to 6 static or LACP trunks Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Configure any stack unit through the same IP address 1 SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE only 2 2 CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Note When configuring a stack connect to the console port on the Master unit Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running
234. ch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 47 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client
235. ch is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated USER AUTHENTICATION Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus
236. cifying a Remote Engine ID 00 3 54 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 0 0 0 0 00 cee ee eee 3 55 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 0 3 58 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 0000s 3 61 Setting SNMPv3 Views 0 cee cece eee 3 67 User Authentication tri ace ioe hal a Lb Mote Nae 3 69 Configuring User Accounts 0 00 cece eee eee 3 70 Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 72 Contouring AE UPS tsa Seki ant Stee Ma aa nae ae 3 75 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate 3 77 Configuring the Secure Shell 00 00 0000 cece eee 3 78 Generating the Host Key Pair 0 000008 3 81 Configuring the SSH Server 0 e eee eee 3 83 Configuring Port Security 6 eee eee 3 85 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 00 3 88 Displaying 802 1X Global Settings 00 3 89 Configuring 802 1X Global Settings 3 90 Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X 04 3 91 Displaying 802 1X Statistics 2 0 0 eee eee eee 3 94 Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3 96 Access Control Lasts en posse oe ales howd Baie wed Bet Ged ee hes 3 98 Configuring Access Control Lists 00000 e ee 3 98 Setting the ACL Name and Type 0055 3 99 Configuring a Standard IP ACL 0 000 3 100 Configuring an Extended IP ACL 04 3 101 Conf
237. col In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty promp
238. communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required 3 59 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users New Delete Use Name Group Name Engine ID Model Level Authentication Privancy I ma r amp d 80000000030004e2b316054321 V3 noAuthNoPriv None None SNMPv3 Remote Users New SNMPV3 User User Name E Group Name C l public gt Remote IP 192 168 119 z Security Model Ma Security Level noAuthNoPriv User Authentication Authentication Protocol i MD5 z Authentication Oooo Password Data Priva
239. configured Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 272 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 0 0 12 Eth1 12 USER ale 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 3 227 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3 228 Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 222 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attributes e Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service
240. console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 4 14 Console config line login local 4 15 Console config line password 0 secret 4 16 Console config line timeout login response 0 4 17 Console config line exec timeout 0 4 18 Console config line password thresh 5 4 19 Console config line silent time 60 4 20 Console config line databits 8 4 20 Console config line parity none 4 21 Console config line speed auto 4 22 Console config line stopbits 1 4 23 Console config line end Console show line console 4 24 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Console 3 32 BASIC CONFIGURATION Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface Command Attributes Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Default 23 e Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into
241. cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 e Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 212 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if 4 220 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree port priority Use this command to configure the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage
242. cuous port s Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs Secondary VLAN On this switch all secondary VLANs are community VLANs A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports Trunk The trunk identifier Private VLAN Port Information only Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Port Information or Private VLAN Trunk Information Private VLAN Port Information Port PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Trunk 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Promiscuous 5 4 Host 6 5 Host 6 Figure 3 86 Displaying Private VLAN Port Information 3 199 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 247 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Ethl 3 5 6 community Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Console Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces 3 200 Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration menus to
243. cy Privacy Protocol DES56 Privacy Password Back Add Figure 3 28 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3 60 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 167 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 169 No user exist SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol none Privacy Protocol none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes Group Name The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters Model The group security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available fo
244. d force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 25 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized yes 1 26 enabled Single Host Auto yes 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 4 118 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 802 1X is enabled on port 26 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Multi Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine Stat
245. d therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 181 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 3 189 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table vian 1 gt Name DefaultVlan Status 7 Enable Port Tagged eee Trunk Member c e a gt a a lalalalalala I e ajajaja a alolololol a Figure 3 80 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 238 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 u
246. d Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the aa nterface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors PORT CONFIGURATION Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment e
247. d Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 206 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 207 spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 208 forward time forward time 4 204 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 56 Spanning Tree Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge hello GC 4 209 hello time time spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 210 maximum age spanning tree default Sets the spanning tree priority to use GC 4 211 priority increments specified by IEEE 802 1D steps of 1 or 802 1t steps of 4096 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 211 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for GC 4 212 pathcost method RSTP MSTP spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for GC 4 213 transmission limit RSTP MSTP spanning tree Adjusts the bridge priority in an attempt to GC 4 214 backup root take over as the root bridge if it loses contact with the original root device spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 214 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 215 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree MST 4 216 instance name Configures the name for the multiple MST 4 217 spanning tree revision Configures the revision number for
248. d IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members Glossary 3 GLOSSARY IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP A network layer protocol that reports errors in processing IP packets ICMP is also used by routers to feed back information about better routing choices Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the
249. d an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled e Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 123 USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 None Enabled ot 2 None Enabled ft 3 None F Enabiea e 4 Noe J I Enabled bpo 5 Trap and Shutdown F Enabled po 6 Noe y I Enabled fp 7 Noe I Enabled bo 8 Nore I Enabled a 9 Nowe I Enabled gt 10 None Enabled bp 11 Noe l I Enabled bo 12 Noe x I Enabled Po Figure 3 36 Enabling Port Security CLI This example enables port security for Port 5 with the intrusion action to send a trap and disable the port and then sets the maximum addresses to learn on the port to 20 config interface ethernet 1 5 config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 108 config if port security
250. d in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 15 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NY OD my BY GW DM ejl Oo 3 211 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority Interface e Por zl c Trunk Select CoSO0 DSCP 1 CoS 0 DSCP2 CoS 0 DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 z Class of Service Value 0 7 Restore Default DSCP Priority Table Figure 3 94 Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values 21 Mapping specific values for DSCP Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 212 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the sw
251. d level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 58 Default Setting Disabled Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved e Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear log Use this command to clear messages from the log buffer Syntax clear log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console tclear log Console Related Commands show log 4 63 show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 68 trap Displays settings for the tra
252. d listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 139 show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 140 mac access group 4 146 4 142 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list mac mask precedence This command changes to MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with
253. d port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP system priority Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key acp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed ie it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link 4 189 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 6 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk e Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The fol
254. d rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Dey ee Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Masks for Access Control Lists You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny the rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Table 4 35 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP 4 122 port number protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet 4 138 format and Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs 4 150 assigned to each port 4 121 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS IP ACLs Table 4 36 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters GC 4 123 con
255. d shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 184 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 18 for a description of the displayed items 4 249 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Example Console show bridge ext Max support VLAN numbers 259 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Tes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 4 250 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1
256. d to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option 4 207 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs ona port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mo
257. d with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues e hardware output queues 0 3 Use the no form to set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos cosn no queue cos map e queue_id The ID of the priority queue e Ranges are 0 to 3 where 3 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 4 257 PRIORITY COMMANDS 4 258 Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p stan
258. dard as shown below Table 4 65 Default CoS Priority Levels Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map CoS values 1 and 2 to priority queue 0 value 3 to queue 1 values 4 and 5 to queue 2 and values 6 and 7 to queue 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 1 2 Console config if queue cos map 1 3 Console config if queue cos map 2 4 5 Console config if queue cos map 3 6 7 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 012 3 Priority Queue 1001 Console 5 7 2 3 WO 4 2 Related Commands show queue cos map 4 260 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console sh queue mode Wrr status Enabled Console show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console 4 259 PRIORITY COMMANDS
259. de Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port Ifyou enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number e When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 4 x or later versions 4 41 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 77 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 82 Example Console config ip http secure server Cons
260. de rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 4 208 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time me no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command set
261. default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote 7p address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote address e local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ip address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 1 26 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 4 156 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using 4 160 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engin
262. default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 12 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 Priorit 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 y The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 13 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background Spare default Best Effort Excellent Effort Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter 2 0 3 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Network Control Command Attributes Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue 17 CLI shows Queue ID 3 204 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Web 8 Click Priority Traffic Classes Mark an interface and click Select to display the current mapping of CoS values to output queues Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues for the selected interface then click Apply Traffic Classes Interface G Port hd C Trun Select Priority Traffic Class 03
263. dence 5 CoS 5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Service Value 0 7 Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 3 93 Mapping IP Precedence to Class of Service Values CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 5 and then displays all the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 4 262 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4 263 Console config if end 20 Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 210 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 4 267 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 1 0 Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits and it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are define
264. des an i ona eae Tkck a Sit acs 4 165 simp server USED on joan wees Ee Ree ha a a be 4 167 show snmp User aeaa a a ako ea odd dae a 4 169 Interface Commands sosa eriei d eaa eee eee ee 4 170 INLETIAGE 2d ses cs sere es citer ceed erat A tel 4 171 GESCtipHOniew ssa sisi Wotan sii ete e cies Ahk Sis he 4 171 speed duplex sia cata data ada dat besa ee 5k 4 172 TABLE OF CONTENTS HESHIN 428 h2 hae Alero Sea hear A aera 5 4 173 Capabilities it Le A ace DN elt tb oN ales Si Sod aur ee 4 174 floweontroll siy iane raid gs tae Aka dea 4 175 SHutd Owl pensaana Ee kone coats Rinne areas Rien oh eS 4 176 switchport broadcast packet rate 6 6 eee 4 177 Clear COUNTERS sa teer iaaii k deletes a D a i od 4 178 show interfaces status nuses sssr eee eee eee 4 179 show interfaces Counters ssusss eee eee 4 180 show interfaces switchport 0 6 0 ce cece eee ee eee 4 182 Mirror Port Commands 0 eee ee 4 184 POL MONHOH 1d da al ea ae Ae 4 184 show pott MONItOn wes Loge eke Pei Ae a eek 4 185 Rate Limit Commands Sarien a a eee eee 4 186 Fate limits noe aan ed E E tne SL An Be 2 4 187 Link Aggregation Commands 066 cece eee 4 188 channel oroup aa hci east Aahee AS Vas Saas Aa wean AG Ee 4 190 DAC fei hare setae tay ah ae a eS bein es aS a 4 190 lacp system priority 6 0 cece ee eee 4 192 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface 0000 4 193 lacp admin key Port Channel 0 000 0
265. dget the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied power See Setting a Switch Power Budget on page 3 147 for details Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 200 4 91 Console config PoE is enabled for all ports by default Power can be disabled for a port by using the no form of the power inline CLI command as shown in the example below Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if no power inline Console config if 2 15 INITLAL CONFIGURATION 2 16 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol see Setting the IP Address on page 3 19 1 Set user names and passwords using
266. ding a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 3 151 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage e A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device e The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access 3 85 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 86 e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 117 Command Attributes e Port Port number e Name Descriptive text page 3 114 e Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Sen
267. does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port Sponnin sta Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port P Role member 1 Enabled Forwarding 1 0 _32768 0 0000EBAAAAOD 128 10 Point to Point Disabled Root 2 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32766 0 0004E26316C0 128 2 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 3 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0004E26316C0 128 3 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E26316C0 128 4 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 5 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E26316C0 1285 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 6 Enabled Discarding O 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 1286 Point to Point Enabled Disabled 7 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0004E28316C0 128
268. dress 6 IP Address 7 IP Address 8 Adal Figure 3 106 Mapping IP Addresses to a Host Name 3 233 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 287 Console config ip host rd6 10 1 0 55 4 287 Console show host 4 292 Hostname rd5 Inet address YO E205 55 1 92 1 68 1255 Alias 1 rd6 Console Displaying the DNS Cache 3 234 You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes e No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable e Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or ptimary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry e IP The IP address associated with this record e TTL The time to live reported by the name server e Domain The domain name associated with this record CONFIGURING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE Web Select DNS Cache No Flag Type IP TTL Domain Oo 64 CNAME 207 465 134 222 51 hwww microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 wwe
269. ds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 04 E2 B3 16 C0 Web server enabled Web server port 80 Web secure server enabled Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet server port 23 Authentication login local Authentication enabled local POST result Uart Loopback Test PASS DRAM TeSt i eieiia to Satetian ane e tey ene 6 aoe ete PASS Timer Test sy ews ight de eee ats PASS PCL DEVICE TES darat kis bale tele PASS Switch Int Loopback test PASS Done All Pass Console 4 79 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show usets Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 1 VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 1927156 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s 1 HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for th
270. dware limitation individual port priority settings are not possible Command Attributes Copy IP Precedence Priority Settings Enables or disables copying IP Precedence Priority settings Copy DSCP Priority Settings Enables or disables copying DSCP Priority settings Copy IP Port Priority Settings Enables or disables copying IP Port Priority settings Source Interface Specifies the port or trunk to copy settings from Destination Interface Specifies the ports or trunks to copy settings to Copy Settings Carries out the command 3 215 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority Copy Settings Select the source priority settings to be copied enter the source port or trunk number and choose the destination interface s to copy to then click Copy Settings Copy Settings Copy IP Precedence Priority Settings Enabled Copy DSCP Priority Settings I Enabled Copy IP Port Priority Settings E Enabled Source Interface Port 1 7 C Trunk Z Port y a Trunk 2 3 Destination Interface 6 3 Copy Settings Figure 3 97 Mapping Priority Settings to Ports Trunks CLI This feature not supported through the CLI Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 3 216 Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the pack
271. e This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Default UTC Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before UTC 0 12 or after UTC 0 13 minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before west of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after east of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Pacific hours 8 minute 0 before UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 72 4 73 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec month day year day month year e hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 e sec Second Range
272. e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration GMP Status Enabled Act as IGMP Querier I Enabled GMP Query Count 2 10 e GMP Query Interval 60 125 has seconds GMP Report Delay 6 25 10 seconds GMP Query Timeout 300 500 Bo second GMP Yersion 1 2 2 Figure 3 100 Configuring Internet Group Management Protocol 3 223 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 270 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 273 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 274 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 275 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 276 Console config ip igmp snooping query time out 300 4 277 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 271 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 2
273. e The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled 4 262 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 e cos value Class of Setvice value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping Table 4 67 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 5 4 5 6 7
274. e including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 114 reauth period Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 115 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 115 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 116 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max req Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 111 Status Authorization status authorized or not Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Max Count The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 113 Port control Shows the dotlx mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 112 4 117 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorize
275. e system Default Setting None 4 80 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 15 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unitl Serial number 03260590210A Service tag Hardware version ROB Module A type Stacking Module Module B type not present Number of ports 29 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit ID 1 Loader version 2g 2 0 Boot ROM version Des dee 2 430 Operation code version 2 4 2 13 Console Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 24 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch PE 4 82 configuration to or from flash memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 86 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 87 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 88 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the GC 4 89 system 4 81 FLAsH FILE COMMANDS copy 4 82 Use this command to move upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downl
276. e then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 4 36 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 31 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 101 radius setver port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 102 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 102 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 103 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending GC 4 103 authentication requests show radius setver Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 104 4 100 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE tadius setver host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_
277. e Global PoE Status 3 147 Setting the Switch Power Budget 3 148 Displaying Port PoE Status 0000 3 149 Configuring Port PoE Power 0 000005 3 150 Mapping Ports to Static Addresses 0 3 152 Displaying the MAC Dynamic Address Table 3 153 Setting the Aging Time 0 0 cece eee eee 3 154 Displaying the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 159 Configuring the Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 164 STA Port Information 0 0 0 ce eee eee 3 168 Configuring Spanning Tree Algorithm per Port 3 171 MSTP VLAN Configuration 0 00008 3 173 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 Figure 3 102 Figure 3 103 Figure 3 104 Figure 3 105 Figure 3 106 Figure 3 107 FIGURES MSTP Port Information 00 0 cece eee MSTP Port Configuration 0 0 0 00 00 rrr Globally Enabling GVRP 0 0 0 0 e eee Displaying Basic VLAN information VLAN Current Table 0 0 0 0 cece eee VLAN Static List Creating VLANs VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members Assigning VLAN Port and Tru
278. e IC 4 250 4 232 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 59 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Continued Command Function Mode Page switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 239 vlan interface switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged IC 4 255 default frames interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan v an id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 176 4 233 VLAN COMMANDS switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid
279. e ID In other words the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engineID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 167 Example Console config snmp server engineID local 12345 Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 156 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000 8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console 4 161 SNMP COMMANDS Table 4 42 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP String identifying the local engine ID engineID Local SNMP The number of times that the engine has re initialized since engineBoots the snmp EngineID was last configured Remote SNMP String identifying an engine ID on a remote device engineID IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine snmp server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB
280. e Initialize Console Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on addtess protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as 4 119 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS 4 120 soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP addtess Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet fr
281. e MAC Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 11 Console show mac address table ethernet 1 11 4 202 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 11 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 11 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console 3 153 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Changing the Aging Time You can change the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Status Enables or disables the aging time Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status M Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 300 seconds Figure 3 68 Setting the Aging Time CLI This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 300 4 203 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down
282. e Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 74 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes e SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled e SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16284 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence 3 43 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and clic
283. e downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file CONFIGURING POWER OVER ETHERNET Configuring Power over Ethernet The 24 10 100 Mbps ports on the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE support the IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE standard that enables DC power to be supplied to attached devices over the unused pairs of wires in the connecting Ethernet cable Any 802 3af compliant device attached to a port can directly draw power from the switch over the Ethernet cable without requiring its own separate power source This capability gives network administrators centralized power control for devices such as IP phones and wireless access points which translates into greater network availability A maximum PoE power budget for the switch power available to all switch ports can be defined so that power can be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power In the example below the power mainpower maximum allocation CLI command is used to set the PoE power budget for the switch Range 37 375 watts If devices connected to the switch require more power than the switch bu
284. e eaa a enti e ae eine ahi A eae 3 151 Setting Static Addresses 1 6 eee eee eee 3 151 Displaying the Address Table 0 0 0 cece eee 3 152 Changing the Aging Time 0 6 0 0 0 cee eee eee 3 154 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 00 000 e eee 3 154 Displaying Global Settings 00 0 0 c eee 3 156 Configuring Global Settings s ssns sssr rrr ee eee 3 160 Displaying Interface Settings 0 eee eee eee 3 165 Configuring Interface Settings 0 eee ee eee 3 169 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 004 3 172 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3 175 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3 177 VLAN Gonfigutation i icc lide ea Soe d tigated a due BAK ae eds 3 179 TEEE 802 10 VEGANS 4 203 dirs acy AeA aed aes ok 3 179 Assigning Ports to VLANS 006 cee cece ee eee 3 180 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 182 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 3 183 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3 184 Displaying Current VLANs 000000 e eee 3 185 Creating VLAN S i053 0 deen CA agate ean ea 3 186 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 188 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 190 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 191 PityatetViLANS 3 Are A EA E AAN adie eae AoA 3 194 Displaying Current Private VLANs 000 3 195 Configuring P
285. e eeeues 4 81 File Directory Information 000008 4 87 Pob Commands i204 ek ASAE ME Gas Ba eo is Ae 4 90 show power mainpower parameters 4 96 show power inline status parameters 4 96 Authentication Commands 0000 ce eee 4 97 Authentication Sequence Command 4 97 RADIUS Client Commands 0 0 00 0005 4 100 TACACS Client Commands 0 005 4 105 Port Security Commands 00 00 00 c eae 4 108 802 1X Port Authentication Commands 4 110 Access Control List Commands 005 4 121 IPACE Commands sponek sd acide dae Bawa oleh 4 122 Egress Queue Priority Mapping 00 8 4 136 MAC ACL Commands 0 00 e eee eee 4 138 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACL Rules 4 148 ACK Information 3 sedan Nake betas ey geet 4 150 SNMP Commands 0 00 e cece eee e eens 4 151 show snmp engine id display description 4 162 show snmp view display description 4 163 show snmp group display description 4 166 show snmp user display description 4 169 Interface Commands 0 cece eee 4 170 show interfaces switchport display description 4 183 Mirror Port Commands 00 0 0 e eee ee 4 184 Rate Limit Commands 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 186 Link Aggregation Commands 00405 4 188 show lacp counters display description
286. e mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst ustance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst zstance_id port priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree e Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 4 225 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 224 spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port ch
287. e private vlan suss 000 eee eee 4 245 TABLE OF CONTENTS switchport private vlan host association 4 246 switchport private vlan mapping 000 8 4 246 show vlan private vlan 2 6 6 eee eee 4 247 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 000005 4 248 bridge ext Ovip arisera eae eae ada age ta dad A 4 249 Show bridgecext jc waria hat Beith aw stents 2b eaten MS 4 249 Switchporteviprit idire act dander hen ee eis Seon Aa 4 250 show gvrp configuration 6 cee eee 4 250 SAP ET nis 2 ct ay E Sat pce ede die Soa Meese EAA 4 251 show carp timer i dc a setae 2 a a Sed E lh 4 252 Priority Commands t dats a ea er et ata ds 2 a 4 253 Priority Commands Layer 2 2 0 eee ee eee 4 254 gueuc Modeny Katyn alae sae Aas 4 254 queue bandwidth esa Lay fave elie wate LR Le Se 4 255 switchport priority default 0 0 c cece 4 256 Queue Cos Ap 52 ok Gis Re a a S a Ges Be 4 257 show queue mode erae aiaa A eee eee 4 259 show queue bandwidth 0 0 0 6 c cece eee 4 259 show queue COS MAaP 6 eee ee 4 260 Priority Commands Layer 3and 4 000 4 260 map ip port Global Configuration 0 4 261 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 262 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 262 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 263 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 264 map ip dscp Interface Configuration
288. e secondary vlan id no private vlan primary v an id association primary vlan id ID of private VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes e secondary vlan id ID of private i e community VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage Secondary VLANs provide security for group members The associated primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network resources within the primary VLAN e g servers configured with promiscuous ports and to resources outside of the primary VLAN via promiscuous ports Example Console config vlan private vlan 2 association 3 Console config COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport mode private vlan Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport mode private vlan host promiscuous no switchport mode private vlan e host This port type can communicate with all other host ports assigned to the same secondary VLAN All communications outside of this VLAN must pass through a promiscuous port in the associated primary VLAN promiscuous This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN as well as with all the ports in the associated secondary VLANs Default Setting Normal VLAN Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Promisc
289. ead Sasso ketal 4 86 a PLFOTO E E ESSENSE SAE TEES ETEEN 4 87 WHICHBOOt o enra tue E E a E A dase 4 88 DOOESYSTEN aadh LotR Sid CBR AM an Sade A EE 4 89 Power over Ethernet Commands 0000s cece ee eens 4 90 power mainpower maximum allocation 008 4 91 power inline compatible 0 0 0 c cece eee ee 4 91 power inline ical Gl hes 0 Medel ie Mag ids 4 93 power inline maximum allocation 0 000 c eee eee 4 93 power inline priority 6 eee ee 4 94 show power inline status 2 6 6 6 cee eee eee 4 95 show powet mainpowet 6 6k 4 96 Authentication Commands 0 cece eee eee 4 97 Authentication Sequence 1 6 6 cee eee ee 4 97 authentication login 6 eee eee 4 98 authentication enables sesan oaia aA 4 99 RADIUS Ghent reiesit E AT hei A A 3 cs 4 100 radius servet host svime aa eee 4 101 tadius servet pOft 2 6 ee ce eee eee 4 102 TABLE OF CONTENTS radius setvert key soi toate teats wate aus 4 102 radius server retransmit 6 eee eee 4 103 radius server timeout n nsnur eee eee 4 103 show tadius server 6 eee eee 4 104 TACAGS Client ct it teat bagi acetate ad 4 105 tacacs Server host citi ik oe AANA Ata a Biba 4 105 taCacs Server port o oaia Ses aed is Gals Acne Ga 4 106 tACACS SELVER KEY ar hinat ce Hi MEA die Hoh Wea ae Hs BU 4 106 show tacacs S fvet soco ariano ee eee S 4 107 Port Security Commands 0 0 0 eee eee 4 107 p rt security e A e
290. ectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin 4 254 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the four class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth veight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 255 Default Setting Weights 1 4 16 and 64 are assigned to queue 0 1 2 and 3 respectively Command Mode Global Configuration 4 255 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example The follow
291. ed COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Interface Line VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 25 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following commands and passwords Username admin Password system login password CLI session with the SMC6824M is opened To end
292. ed to at least one VLAN as untagged e Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member e Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress e Ifnone of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface 4 238 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add v an ist remove v an list no switchport forbidden vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan
293. ed for this user to log in e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting The default access level is Normal Exec The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how to set the access level and password for a uset Console config username BOB access level 15 Console config username BOB password 0 1 Console config 4 35 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place Use this command to control access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level ve 0 7 password no enable password level
294. ed timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 222 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled 4 222 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge pott and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command
295. ed to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requ
296. edence or DSCP Priority of IP frames or change the IEEE 802 1p priority of Layer 2 frames Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change priorities based on a tule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The 802 1p priority may be set for either Layer 2 or IP frames The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type e The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority Command Attributes e Port Port identifier Name Name of ACL Type Type of ACL IP or MAC Precedence IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 802 1p Priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Web Click Priority ACL Marker Select a port and an ACL rule To specify a ToS priority mark the Precedence DSCP check box select Precedence or DSCP from the scroll down box and enter a priority To specify an 802 1p priority mark the 802
297. either 1 Carry the Slow Unknown Pkts Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Pkts value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Console show lacp 1 internal Channel group 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 52 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU Internal information LACP System LACP system priority assigned to this port channel Priority 4 197 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS 4 198 Table 4 52 show lacp internal display description Continued Field LACP Port Priority Description LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Oper State Administrative or operational v
298. ement all c Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End SNMP Client Start IP address End TELNET Client Start IP address End Ie 192 168 1 19 192 2 1921 68 1325 192 Console Inet client 192 168 1 19 lient P address lnet client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 4 37 4 38 3 97 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists 3 98 An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit tules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny tules the packet is accepted You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule This is done by specifying masks that
299. en Se We 4 13 DT in tet tito arta Aen tartaae aos T EEA 4 14 CO eat a EAE E O eae e ht Ahab Ss diel So eid cha ahon 4 15 passworde t steht edna hs anced eles head tot og 4 16 timeout login response 0 6 eee eee 4 17 CXCG UMEOUL 2 RAS te Rai aed ae ha ies Alay a 4 18 password thresh 2 0 6 eee eee 4 19 silent time x 2945 hod aid Ae wanes Thott Ge T 4 20 GAAS so ect Sessa whe Hears Satan ca NaS Jolan gals geste So Jans Oe Ha AB a 4 20 PALiby aa rE Sot ieee Siete gh Mine eh eho ae A 4 21 SPCC 2 ai coats ihe odd at Mag tel S Al Red SA A eat 4 22 STOPPES tsetse Ne is ace ehh den ace he a scone clon oe 4 23 diS CONNEC E i cei cies Wate eae ae cass Mink Sts DE 4 23 show Ine ian a A aE ia ca ae Ae 4 24 General Commands s yi at Bee iced Magu ee Bae 4 25 enable 22s se kok tied eit he ha Seo teen te tits t tg 4 25 disablen stieren piia oats ans Rochas o as his dca tee Ass 4 26 CONDITE ete ui Auten e A E E N E aad Sens id 4 27 SROWDIStOLY vs eis siaii A aE A Eaa E Se EAN 4 27 7a le 1o AAEE E A E E EE 4 28 e E E E E EEEE E E E 4 29 O E E O eee oye eh ie E gees 4 29 UIE LLY herean a acaba a tant a a a A AD dels PES oy 4 30 System Management Commands 0 e ccc eee eee 4 31 Device Designation Commands 0 000 0 c cee 4 32 PLOMPCeArts cece hele as hati Shei As 4 32 Rosae 225 aaa AE TARE ETEA ES 4 33 hehtaariin e NAAA E 4 33 User Access Commands 6 0c cece cece eee 4 34 USE TNA Gis A Ana ena ea i deena Altra ne
300. en specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full e 100BASE FX 100full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 174 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 173 speed duplex 4 172 flowcontrol 4 175 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Flow control enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Flow control can eli
301. ence over port priority Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the preceding item Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less 11 STA Port Information only 3 167 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 168 likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin edge port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events
302. enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line or VLAN 4 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Database You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar Date information dns DNS information dot1x Show 802 1X c
303. er Seconds Seconds 500 20 1000 60 3000 18000 win gt 1 ALL 7 Enabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid 3 Tagged T Enabled I Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid 1 ALL Enabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid n 1 ALL Enabled 1 ALL M Enabled 6 ji ALL x Enabled I Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid M Enabled 30 90 2000 Hybrid I Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid Figure 3 82 VLAN Port Configuration CLI This example sets port 1 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 235 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 236 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 237 Console config if switchport gvrp 4 250 Console config if garp timer join 10 4 251 Console config if garp timer leave 90 4 251 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 4 251 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 234 Console config if Private VLANs 3 194 Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This switch supports two types of private VLAN ports promiscuous and community ports A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN Community ports can only communicate with other ports in their own community
304. er Parameters Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client i e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order e If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used e When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work 3 229 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes e Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 255 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 255 alphanumeric characters 1 3 names Name
305. er State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity 2 Figure 3 57 Displaying CLI The following example di Remote LACP Port Information splays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Port Number Oper Port Number Partner Partner Partner Partner Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Admin Key Oper Key Admin State Oper State 4 196 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 32768 O00 01 F4 78 AE CO 2 2 32768 32768 0 3 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 3 134 PORT CONFIGURATION Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for all ports Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage e Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic
306. er be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit to file Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware 3 23 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 ee 9D a Source Destination Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Softwa
307. eral Commands 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 4 25 System Management Commands 4 31 Device Designation Commands 0005 4 32 User Access Commands 0 0 cece cece eens 4 34 Default Login Settings 0 000 rrer 4 35 IP Filter Commands 0 e eee eee 4 37 Web Server Commands 0 ccc cece eee 4 39 HTTPS System Support 0 4 42 Telnet Server Commands 0 estns irs 4 43 Secure Shell Commands 000 0000 00008 4 45 show ssh display description 00005 4 54 Event Logging Commands 0 6 0 0 e cee 4 56 Logoing Levels is ecsei eh cee nea eee eae eo 4 58 TABLES XX Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab e 4 19 e 4 20 e 4 21 e 4 22 e 4 23 e 4 24 e 4 25 e 4 26 e 4 28 e 4 27 e 4 29 e 4 30 e 4 31 e 4 32 e 4 33 e 4 34 e 4 35 e 4 36 e 4 37 e 4 38 e 4 39 e 4 40 e 4 41 e 4 42 e 4 43 e 4 44 e 4 45 e 4 46 e 4 47 e 4 48 e 4 49 e 4 50 e 4 51 e 4 52 e 4 53 e 4 55 e 4 54 show logging flash ram display description 4 62 show logging trap display description 4 63 SMTP Commiatids es ciw dag at aa 4 64 Dime Commands lt ccitcu uae thee heals 4 68 System Status Commands 0 000 e eee eee 4 75 Flash File Commands 00000 c e
308. eset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 53 4 49 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ip ssh setver key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh servet key size key size no ip ssh server key size Rey size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key This command deletes the specified uset s public key Syntax delete public key wsername dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 50 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate Use this command to generate the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type e rsa RSA Version 1 key t
309. ests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You 3 181 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on ports to prevent advertisements being propagated or forbid ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 188 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network i b a a a r Sees TRETMA Gms Port based VLAN f 1 i 9 3 4 me EReTeTeseses ISLE Ss desma A 13 10 11 liaz S A y Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 182 If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same un
310. et Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified 4 200 addresses displays current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 204 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port 4 230 membership for VLAN groups also enables or configures private VLANs GVRP and Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic 4 248 Bridge Extension VLAN learning shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict 4 253 priority or weighted round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters 4 269 and specifies ports attached to a multicast router IP Interface Configures the IP address and gateway for management 4 280 access DNS Configures DNS services 4 286 Only the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE support Power over Ethernet The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations NE Normal Exec PE Privileged Exec GC Global Configuration IC Interface Configuration VC VLAN Database Configuration LC Line Configuration ACL Access Control List Configuration COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s
311. et itself For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see page 3 204 Table 3 16 CoS to ACL Mapping Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the tule Command Attributes e Port Port identifier e Name Name of ACL Type Type of ACL IP or MAC e CoS Priority CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL tule Range 0 7 Web Click Priority ACL CoS Priority Select a port select an ACL rule specify a CoS priority then click Add ACL CoS Priority ACL CoS Priority Configure CoS Priority 0 7 Mamea O E Port Name Type ACL CoS Priority Mapping Port Name Type CoS Priority 1 bill P o Remove Figure 3 98 Mapping CoS Values to ACLs CLI This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 4 135 Console config if 23 For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 98 3 217 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules 3 218 You can change traffic priorities for frames matching the defined ACL tule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking This switch can change the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Prec
312. eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 P y 88 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet IT packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address e host A specific MAC address source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask e address bitmask Bitmask for MAC address in hexadecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4093 vid bitmask s VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 e protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets 26 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 141 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS A detaile
313. ets REM ei nae shoe ace Aa Miaa rona SEM EA seek A 4 284 DNS Commands 2 054405 sees ne Peed TEA ee Sen 4 286 PPOs ts ergs ue wt dence OOM cee AP E eat cB SoA cer eS 4 287 Clear Jost ced iced dda eee ead teeta As atone Bes 4 288 Ip domainname ss o o Weta t shales Mee a Sasi ans oe BEY 4 288 ip domainlist 242 25 a0 24nd ais hehe ASS 4 289 Ip fame servenu Asal a toed anes hse et AY Aged 2 So 4 290 ip domain lookup 1 2 0 0 ccc eee eee 4 291 SHOW NOSSA eh a e a Aaa Sous uae dese Hae Ad 4 292 SHOW HIS i So cde dace tyra E e EE PAE nara eet cane RRA 4 293 showzdns aches 2450 ahd AE A tl a ey aut hed amp 4 293 clear dtis Cach saciar et ath bees oe eed whe dS 4 294 T4BLE OF CONTENTS APPENDICES A Software Specifications 0 0 cee eee eee ee A 1 Software F Catures ra iian Ahens Bee Koes Aho aaa Cabbage a Eaa A 1 Management Meatutes cii ieyra tink Sages oda dk A 2 Standatds sss ty tnuasds Wai ho E A hae Be S i A 3 Management Information Bases 0000 c cece cece eee A 4 B Troubleshooting 00 64 5 04iets ven e s eee Segoe sw B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface 00 B 1 Using System oost 1 2 3s sadroha deen ad tel dyars edad candles B 3 Glossary Index xvii T4BLE OF CONTENTS xviii Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 Table 3 5 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 Table 3 Table 3 Table 3 T
314. ettings page page 3 69 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254 15020245593199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545 24083971752646358058176716709574804776117 3 Import Clients Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 82 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management acce
315. eyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the 66 S keywords starting with Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh tartup config system Console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes 4 6 The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the select
316. f 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group 4 193 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel 4 194 This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key
317. f permit or deny rules e Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Permit ho 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit Address TypeiP_ z IP Address fiea92160 Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 Aad Figure 3 43 Configuring Standard IP ACLs CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit ho
318. figuration mode access list ip Automatically creates extra masks to GC 4 123 extended support fragmented ACL entries fragment auto mask permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source STD A 4 124 IP address CL permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified EXT A 4 125 criteria including source and destination IP CL address TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 128 access list ip Changes to the mode for configuring access GC 4 129 mask precedence control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules IP Mask 4 130 show access list ip Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for PE 4 133 mask precedence IP ACLs ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 134 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 134 map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 135 output queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE 4 136 access list ip for an interface match access list ip Changes the 802 1p priority IP IC 4 137 Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 138 4 122 packet marking COMMAND LINE INTERFACE access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP
319. g No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address LO os 0 55 1 92 1 68 1 55 Alias Console 4 287 DNS COMMANDS clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name name Name of the host Range 1 255 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console config clear host Console config ip domain name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 2
320. g config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config file to unit Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack unit to file Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings or PD_Controller to copy a PoE controller file File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 ee 99 o Source Destination Unit Stack unit Range 1 8 Note Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only three configuration files including the factory defaults file 3 27 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3 28 You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Copy Choose tftp to startup config or tftp to fi
321. ge When updating the PoE controller first copy the PD controller file from a TFTP server to the switch s file system tftp to file and then copy this file to the controller file to file When specifying the file type PD_Controller or PoE for copy operations via the web or CLI file types other than PoE controller may be downloaded but will not adversely affect the system Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration BASIC CONFIGURATION file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the runnin
322. ge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports 3 155 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTD the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings 3 156 You can display a summary of the
323. gging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap status command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as facility type specified in the logging facility command REMOTELOG _ The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote level type server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host server IP address command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 68 show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory Syntax show log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 63 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example The following example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console SMTP Alert Commands Configures SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4
324. guration Configures priority and VLANs for a 3 172 spanning tree instance Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST 3 175 instance Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST 3 175 instance Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST 3 177 instance Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST 3 177 instance VLAN 3 179 802 1Q VLAN 3 179 GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3 183 Basic Information Displays basic information on the VLAN 3 184 type supported by this switch Current Table Shows the current port members of each 3 185 VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 186 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 188 Static Membership by Configures membership type for interfaces 3 190 Port including tagged untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 191 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN 3 191 attributes NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Private VLAN 3 194 Information Shows private VLANs and associated ports 3 195 Configuration Configures private VLANs 3 197 Association Maps a secondary VLAN to a primary VLAN 3 198 Port Information Sh
325. he authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Protocol Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device 4 169 INTERFACE COMMANDS Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 46 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface GC 4 171 configuration mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 171 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a IC 4 172 given interface when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 173 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for IC 4 174 use in autonegotiation flowconttol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 175 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 176 switchport Configures broadcast storm control IC 4 177 broadcast packet rate cleat counters Clears the statistics on a given interface PE 4 178 show interfaces Displays status for the specified interface NE 4 179 status PE show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE 4 180 counters PE show interf
326. he no form to remove the specified private VLAN Syntax ptivate vlan v an id community primary no private vlan v an id e vlan id ID of private VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes community A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to port members primary A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs and serves to channel traffic between community VLANs and other locations Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same VLAN community and channel traffic passing outside the community through promiscuous ports that have been mapped to the associated primary VLAN Port membership for private VLANs is static Once a port has been assigned to a private VLAN it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode See switchport mode on page 4 234 Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan private vlan 2 primary Console config vlan private vlan 3 community Console config 4 243 VLAN COMMANDS ptivate vlan association 4 244 Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary i e community VLAN Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN Syntax ptivate vlan primary vlan id association secondary vlan id add secondary vlan id remov
327. he password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included Console config snmp server group r d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d Console config snmp server user steve group r d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 45 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4 151 Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 13 INITLAL CONFIGURATION Managing System Files 2 14 The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files tha
328. he speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line COMMAND LINE INTERFACE stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect This command terminates an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection 4 23 LINE COMMANDS Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 53 show users 4 80
329. hen operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option 8 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 3 160 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global
330. host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging tagged frames E TE VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware tagged untagged frames aa frames oe VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame VLAN CONFIGURATION Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still ne
331. ification MaintenanceStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 44 indicates a Port Change Notification Status and is sent on every status change pethMainPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 45 This notification UsageOnNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 45 indicates PSE Threshold usage indication is on the power usage is above the threshold pethMainPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 46 This notification UsageOffNotification 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 46 indicates that the PSE Threshold usage indication is off the usage power is below the threshold These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu page 3 52 3 65 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups New Delete Gro p Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View I public vi noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none I public DA noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none I private a sgAuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none F private V2C F secure users V3 Grou
332. ified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 43 SNMP 3 45 Configuration Configures community strings and related 3 48 trap functions Agent Status Allows SNMP to be enabled or disabled 3 50 SNMPv3 3 53 Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on this switch 3 53 Remote Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID for a remote 3 54 device Users Configures SNMP v3 users on this switch 3 55 Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users from a remote 3 58 device Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3 61 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3 67 Security 3 69 User Accounts Configures user names and passwords 3 70 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence 3 72 RADIUS and TACACS HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 75 SSH 3 78 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 83 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and 3 81 private Port Security Configures per port security including status 3 85 response for security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 3 7 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 8 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page 802 1X Port authentication 3 88 Information Displays the global configuration setting 3 89 Configuration Configures the global configuration setting 3 88 Port Configuration Sets parameters for individual ports 3 94 Statistics Displays protocol
333. iguring a MAC ACL 6 6 eee eee 3 104 Configuring ACL Masks 00 c eee cece eee 3 107 Specifying the Mask Type 0 000 rnnr 3 107 Configuring an IP ACL Mask 0 0000 3 108 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 0005 3 110 Binding a Port to an Access Control List 4 3 112 Port Configuration 4 iin ie iin hele ee Gee 3 114 Displaying Connection Status 0 6 0 c eee ee eee 3 114 Configuring Interface Connections 0000000 3 117 Creating Trunk Groups 0 cee eee ee 3 120 Statically Configuring a Trunk 000 3 121 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports 005 3 123 Configuring LACP Parameters 00004 3 125 Displaying LACP Port Counters 005 3 129 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for Local Side 3 130 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for Remote Side 3 133 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 0000 3 135 Configuring Port Mirroring 0 6 eee cee 3 136 Configuring Rate Limits 00 3 138 Showing Port Statistics 6 ccc eee eee 3 139 T4BLE OF CONTENTS Power Over Ethernet Settings 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 3 145 Switch Power Status 2 00 0 cc eee ee eens 3 146 Setting a Switch Power Budget 000000 3 147 Displaying Port Power Status 0 cece eee eee 3 148 Configuring Port PoE Power 0 6 c cee ee eee 3 149 Address Table Settings sj
334. ile name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 89 Console config exit Console reload 4 28 3 29 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH This example shows how to download a PoE controller file from a TFTP server Console tcopy tftp file 4 82 TFTP server IP address 10 3 4 50 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode 3 PD Controller lt 1 3 gt 3 Source file name 7012 _007 s19 Destination file name PoE test Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a PoE controller file from another unit in the stack Console tcopy file controller 4 82 Unit lt 1 2 gt 2 Choose controller type Te SPORE 2 MDSL Se TBD e330 7 Source file name PoE test Software downloading in progress please wait Unit 1 done Console Console Port Settings 3 30 You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface Co
335. ill at its discretion replace an older product in its product line with one that incorporates these newer technologies At that point the obsolete product is discontinued and is no longer an Active SMC product A list of discontinued products with their respective dates of discontinuance can be found at http www smc com index cfm action customet_service_warranty All products that are replaced become the property of SMC Replacement products may be either new or reconditioned Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30 day limited warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty whichever is longer SMC is not responsible for any custom software or firmware configuration information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any warranty Products returned to SMC should have any customer installed accessory or add on components such as expansion modules removed prior to returning the product for replacement SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning any product to SMC Proof of purchase may be required Any product returned to SMC without a valid Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package will be returned to customer at customer s expense For warranty claims within North America please c
336. ilter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage e Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered e First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL 3 107 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Security ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit IP Ingress Edit IP Egress Edit Mac Ingress Edit IMac Egress Edit Figure 3 46 Choosing ACL Types CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds
337. ing Yes Local VLAN Capable No OMRP I Enabled Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 249 Max support VLAN numbers 255 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the IP Address An IP address may be used for management access to the switch over your network By default the switch uses DHCP to assign IP settings to VLAN 1 on the switch If you wish to manually configure IP settings you need to set an IP address and subnet mask that is compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment 3 19 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 20 You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything other than this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4093 This is the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch By default all ports on the switch are members of VL
338. ing example shows how to assign WRR weights of 1 3 5 and 7 to the CoS priority queues 0 1 2 and 3 Console config queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 Console config Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 259 switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If 4 256 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used This switch provides four priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagge
339. ing state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migration If at any time the switch detects STA BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Priority Path Cost Admin Link Type Admin Edge Port 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 Pe East Forwarding F Enabled Forwarding 128 200000 Auto Enabled I Enabled Port Spanning Tree STA State Migration Trunk F Enabled Discarding 128 200000 Auto M Enabled I Enabled F Enabled I Enabled Le vel tal 1 2 3 M Enabled Discarding fi28 200000 Au
340. interface e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups 4 278 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic Example The following shows the ports in VLAN 1 which are attached to multicast routers Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 1
341. interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 282 4 281 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 284 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DCHP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 282 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command e DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following exa
342. ion 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and TEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 1OOOBASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full JOOOBASE SX LX LH 1000full 100BASE FX 100full Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 120 Note Autonegotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options 3 118 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings
343. ion port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 3 133 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Interface Port Trunk ID 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Number O 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted 2 Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing 2 Oper State Distributing a Admin State Collecting i A Oper State Collecting g m o rena A Oper State Synchronization d Admin State Aggregation _ Oper State Aggregation oA Admin State Timeout Long Op
344. ion page displays information on the private VLANs configured on the switch including primary and community VLANs and their associated interfaces Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 3 195 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 196 Primary VLAN The primary VLAN with which the selected VLAN is associated Note that this displays as VLAN 0 if the selected VLAN is itself a primary VLAN e Ports List The list of ports and assigned type in the selected private VLAN Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Information Select the desired port from the VLAN ID drop down menu Private VLAN Information VLAN ID 5 Primary Vian hd Primary Vian Vian 0 Ports List Unit 1 Port 3 Promiscuous Unit 1 Port 4 Host Unit 1 Port5 Host Figure 3 83 Displaying Private VLAN Port Information CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 247 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Ethl 3 5 6 community Eth1 4 Ethl 5 Console VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring Private VLANs The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create remove primary or community VLANs C
345. ion to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Note When these switches switches are stacked together you must connect to the RS 232 port on the Master unit to be able to access the CLI Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command 4 1 USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC6824M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection 4 2 Telnet operates over the IP transport proto
346. ions 2 3 CoS configuring 3 202 4 253 IP precedence 3 209 4 262 layer 2 priorities 3 202 4 254 layer 3 4 priorities 3 208 4 260 queue mapping 3 202 4 257 queue mode 3 206 4 254 INDEX D default gateway configuration 3 20 4 282 default priority ingress port 3 202 4 256 default settings system 1 7 DHCP 3 22 4 280 client 4 286 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DNS default domain name 3 229 4 288 displaying the cache 3 234 4 293 domain name list 3 229 4 289 enabling lookup 3 229 4 291 name server list 3 229 4 290 static entries 3 232 4 290 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 3 24 4 82 DSCP enabling 3 211 4 265 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 3 168 4 221 event logging 3 35 4 56 F firmware version displaying 3 15 4 80 firmware upgrade 3 24 4 82 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 20 4 282 GVRP global setting 3 183 4 249 Index 1 INDEX H hardware version displaying 3 15 4 80 HTTPS secure server 3 75 4 41 I IEEE 802 1D 3 155 4 207 IEEE 802 1s 3 155 4 207 IEEE 802 1w 3 155 4 207 IEEE 802 1X 3 88 4 110 IGMP configuring 3 220 4 269 description of protocol 3 220 Layer 2 3 220 3 221 4 269 query 3 221 3 222 4 273 snooping 3 221 4 269 snooping configuring 3 222 4 269 ingress filtering 3 192 4 236 IP address BOOTP DHCP service 3 22 4 280 setting 3 19 4 280 IP precedence enabli
347. ip_address host_alias auth port auth_por timeout meoud retransmit retransmit key key e index Allows you to specific up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires e host_ip_address IP address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting e auth port 1812 e timeout 5 seconds e retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config 4 101 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius setver port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no tradius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config
348. it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode Use this command to select the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1D e rstp Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting fs tp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disable
349. itch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 5 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 4 264 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 265 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 5 4 268 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 A 0 Eth 1 5 2 0 Eth 1 5 3 0 Eth 1 5 63 0 Console Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority e Interface Selects the port or trunk interface to which the settings apply IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces 3 213 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority IP Port Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Global Status Enabled Figure 3 95 Globally Enabling the IP Port Priority Status Web
350. ithin the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view 3 67 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 68 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMPv3 Views A Name OID Subtrees _ rdadaccess View OID Subtrees Actions Edit OID Subtrees J defgultview View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subrrees ojojoj SNMP v3 Views View write ccess View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees View readaccess SNMP v3 View Edit OID Subtree Type 1 3 6 1 2 Included Back View Name Current New OID Subt lt lt Add sch Type Included z Remove Back Figure 3 30 Configuring SNMPv3 Views USER AUTHENTICATION CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 306 212 2142 02 1 1 sineluded 4 162 Console config exit Console show snm
351. ity PORT CONFIGURATION Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 8 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Member Port 1 Trunk ID 2 LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Receive Marker Sent Marker Unknown Pkts Marker Receive Marker Illegal Pkts Figure 3 55 Displaying LACP Port Counters Information 3 129 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters 4
352. ius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 34 authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 25 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server 4 99 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not availabl
353. ivate vlan mapping primary vlan id ID of primary VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes 4 246 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN and with the group members within any associated secondary VLANs Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 2 Console config show vlan private vlan Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch Syntax show vlan private vlan community primary community Displays all community VLANs along with their associate primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces primary Displays all primary VLANs along with any assigned promiscuous interfaces Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Executive 4 247 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Example Console sh vlan private vlan Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 2 primary Ethl 2 2 3 community Ethl 3 2 4 community Ethl 4 2 5 community Ethl 5 6 primary Eth1 6 6 7 community Ethl 7 6 8 community Ethl 8 6 9 community Ethl 9 Console GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VL
354. iver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 4 156 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console config Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth Console config Console config Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1d bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be BASIC CONFIGURATION used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and t
355. ivileged access mode 4 25 restarting the system or quitting the CLI System Controls system logs system passwords user name 4 31 Management browser management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 81 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote 4 97 authentication also configures port security and IEEE 802 1X port access control Access Control Provides filtering for IP frames based on address 4 119 Lists protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures 4 151 community access strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet 4 170 ports aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without 4 184 affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or 4 186 received on a port Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical 4 188 trunk configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks 4 11 COMMAND GROUPS 4 12 Table 4 4 Command Group Index Continued Command Group Description Page Power over Configures power output for connect devices 4 90 Ethern
356. join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 0 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 065535 0 65
357. k ACL ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding Port IP MAC IN IN OUT x M Enable david gt I Enable david M Enable jeny zi I Enable jery z M Enable david gt TM Enable david z O Enable em z I Enable jery z T Enable david z I Enable david z m Enable em z I Enable jerry z T Enable david I Enable david z m Enable ery I Enable jery z I Enable david z l Enable david O Enable em z I Enable jery z 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 3 49 Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Egress Queues I Enable david z I Enable david m Enable erry zj I Enable jery z CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if ip access group david in 4 134 Console config if mac access group jerry in 4 146 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if Console config if exit Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection
358. k Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server fios org 137 82 14080 126 250 362 Figure 3 20 SNTP Configuration CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 70 Console config sntp poll 60 4 71 Console config sntp client 4 69 Console config exit Console show sntp 4 72 Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 11 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east after or west before of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Default UTC Range 1 29 characters 3 44 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Hours 0 13 The number of hours before UTC 0 12 or after UTC 0 13 Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or af
359. k es a ee a 4 108 802 1X Port Authentication 0 eee eee 4 110 dot1x system auth control 10 0 0 0 c ee eee eee 4 111 dotixdetaglt saskaita ag Bag n 4 111 dotlximax req 2 i4i6 doth hee dt R ed hia do 4 111 dotixiporticonttol lt serre ph aaae Bar We oe Baers A 4 112 dot1x operation mode 0 cece eee eee 4 113 dot1x re authenticate 26 6 cee ee eee 4 114 dot1x re authentication 6 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 114 dot1x timeout quiet period 0 6 00 eee 4 115 dot1x timeout re authperiod 0 eee eee 4 115 dot1x timeout tx petiod 0 eee eee eee 4 116 show dotik a4 sues starts Ase Leeder 4ech es die ce 4 116 Access Control List Commands 00 00 c eee eee 4 119 IPACES ei irae due Aten yatta dnt EEA 4 122 access list Ipa eaa LY Saket E A ek SS le keel i 4 123 access list ip extended fragment auto mask 4 124 permit deny Standard ACL 0 000 000 000 4 124 permit deny Extended ACL 000000 4 125 show ip access listo san e ia han eee eee 4 128 access list ip mask precedence n nunan nrnna 4 129 mask IPA CE ahea tes aeaa an AN AG EA aa 4 130 show access list ip mask precedence 4 133 IPLACEESS OLOUP et tes wend i Baga de done He dts 4 134 show ip access QrOUP 66 eee eee 4 135 map access list Ip eee 4 135 show map access list Ip 6 eee eee eee 4 136 xi T4BLE OF CONTENTS match access list Ip o re a a cee ee eee 4 137
360. k to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port s or TCP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Source Subnet PSP protocol TOS Precedence DSCP Same a carrai Resiove Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask lpitmask Bitmask Bitmask 255 255 255 255 192 168 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any 80 Any Remove Remove ll Entries Source Address Type Any f Source Subnet Mask Destination Address Type Any gt Destination Subnet Mask ooo Protocol Mask I Enabled Serice Type Mask le I TOS Enabled a Precedence Enabled E DSCP Enabled Source Port Bitmask 06553 0 Destination Port Bitmask 0 565535 Control Code Bitmask 0 63 isi Figure 3 47 Configuring an IP based ACL 3 109 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny ce 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip st
361. ker Syntax match access list mac ac _name set priority priority no match access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list mac a set priority 0 Console config if 4 149 ACCE S CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Related Commands show marking 4 138 ACL Information show 4 150 Table 4 40 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 150 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 151 access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 15 0 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 0 0 0 255 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination
362. l be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 4 212 the maximum path cost is 65 535 Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 12 STA Port Configuration only 3 170 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting e Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forward
363. lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp admin key 3 Console config if lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority Ifanactive port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port e Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console
364. larm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm Private Traps 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps swPowerStatus ChangeTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 63 2 1 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 1 This trap is sent when the power state changes SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description swlpFilterRejectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 63 2 1 0 40 This trap is sent when an 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 40 incorrect IP address is 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 40 rejected by the IP Filter swSmtpConnFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 63 2 1 0 41 This trap is triggered if Trap 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 41 the SMTP system cannot 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 41 open a connection to the mail server successfully pethPsePortOnOff 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 43 This notification Notification 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 63 2 1 0 43 indicates if a PSE Power Sourcing Equipment Port is delivering power to the PD Powered Device This notification is sent on every status change except in search mode pethPsePortPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 63 2 1 0 44 This not
365. le and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply Copy tftp to startup contig x TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 Source File Name config startup Factory_Default_Config cig z G startup Startup File Name Figure 3 11 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up BASIC CONFIGURATION If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Management Set Start Up page Set Start Up F Name Type Startup Size bytes C Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File N g 2677 E e startup Config_File N 5465 startup rd Config_File Y 3220 e Mazo Operation Code N 2455012 24211 Operation _Code Y 2454980 Figure 3 12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 82 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration f
366. level of service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the SYSTEM DEFAULTS priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file See Downloading System Software from a Server on page 3 24 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults
367. list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax show access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 133 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Example Console show access list ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 130 ip access group 4 134 This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 2 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if
368. lity 16 23 23 Logging Trap 0 7 4 Host IP Address Current New Host IP List 192 168 1 7 e Host IP Address move Figure 3 16 Remote Logs BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the minimum level of messages to be logged Console config logging host 192 168 1 7 4 59 Console config logging facility 23 4 59 Console config logging trap 4 4 60 Console config Console show logging trap 4 61 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Enabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server IP address 192 168 1 7 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address Console ooo ooo ooo ooo Displaying Log Messages Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functons 1 error number 1 Informaton VLAN 1 lnk up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number Intormaton STP topology change notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functons 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 redundant power change
369. ll be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port 16 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 202 CLASS OF SERVIC
370. ll not be matched by any ACL tule and will be handled according to the default permit or deny rule Example Console config tacacs list ip extended fragment auto mask Console config permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address e source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match e host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None 4 124 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255
371. lowing example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled 4 190 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk has been established Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config exit Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information P
372. lt setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled Max Request Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds 3 91 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 92 Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds e Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration
373. m terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state e The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line 4 16 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands login 4 15 password thresh 4 19 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 300 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line
374. main name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 4 74 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address mapping GC 4 287 clear host Deletes entries from the host name to address PE 4 288 table ip domain name Defines a default domain name for incomplete GC 4 288 host names ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for GC 4 289 incomplete host names ip name server Specifies the address of one or more name GC 4 290 servers to use for host name to address translation ip domain lookup Enables DNS based host name to address GC 4 291 translation show hosts Displays the static host name to address PE 4 292 mapping table show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 4 293 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 4 293 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE 4 294 4 286 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name address address2 address name Name of the host Range 1 255 characters e address Corresponding IP address e address2 address8 Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Settin
375. mand Usage e If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e Ifacceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if 4 237 VLAN COMMANDS switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add v an ist tagged untagged remove v an list no switchport allowed vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting e All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assign
376. matically supplied when a device is detected on the port providing that the power demanded does not exceed the switch or port power budget Default Enabled e Priority Sets the power priority for the port Options low high or critical Default low Power Allocation Sets the power budget for the port Range 3000 15400 milliwatts Default 15400 milliwatts Web Click PoE Power Port Configuration Enable PoE power on selected ports set the priority and the power budget and then click Apply Power Port Configuration Power Allocation 3000 15400 milliwatts iow gt 73000 M Enabled criticar isao M Enabled low z fisooo M Enabled high gt fiszo0 Port Admin Status Priority 1 M Enabled ajaj win M Enabled high 15200 x Figure 3 65 Configuring Port PoE Power 3 150 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS CLI This example sets the PoE power budget for port 1 to 8 watts the priority to high 2 and then enables the power Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 171 Console config if power inline maximum allocation 8000 4 93 Console config if power inline priority 2 4 94 Console config if power inline auto 4 93 Console config if Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresse
377. max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 271 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 276 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query time out 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 271 Ao MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 72 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 4 278 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 279 mrouter ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan v an id mrouter
378. me instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 160 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Command Attributes e MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 e VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 e VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4093 The other global attributes are described under Displaying Global Settings page 3 156 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 165 Web Click Spanning Tree MST
379. ment options including SNMP RMON and a web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is assigned via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 7 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft TE version 5 0 and higher The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as SMC EliteView 2 1 INITLAL CONFIGURATION The switch s CLI configuration program web interface and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for the management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Power attached devi
380. minate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and TEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation 4 175 INTERFACE COMMANDS To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control ona port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lowcontrol Console config if no negotiation Console config if shutd 4 176 Related Commands negotiation 4 173 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 174 own This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage
381. ministrator responsible for the switch Example Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config 4 66 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The recipient email address for alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 67 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 192 168 1 19 SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted this company com SMTP source email address bill this company com
382. mmand Attributes Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds BASIC CONFIGURATION e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits e Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Def
383. mote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device ip address The Internet address of the remote device e vl v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input e auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication e md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication e auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required e priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with 56 bit DES data encryption priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine 4 167 SNMP COMMANDS 4 168 ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command e Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 4 160 to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where
384. mp snooping vlan Adds an interface as a member of a multicast GC 4 270 static group ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 271 version show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query PE 4 272 configuration show Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast PE 4 272 mac address table list multicast 4 269 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan id static ip address interface e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 ip address IP address for multicast group interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 270 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP s
385. mple the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if exit Console tip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP interface vlan IP address and netmask 10 1 0 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode Dhcp Console Related Commands ip address 4 280 show ip interface Use this command to display the settings for the switch s IP interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 284 4 283 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 282 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping ost count coun size size bost IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 e size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information Default Setting This command has n
386. must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client e The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides client authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information 802 1X System Authentication Control Disabled Figure 3 37 802 1X Global Information 3 89 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1lx 4 116 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 26 Console Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides client authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration
387. n 100fu None Enabled 8 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 9 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled 10 100Base TX Enabled Down 100fu None Enabled Figure 3 50 Port Port Information Field Attributes CLI Basic information e Port type Indicates the port type LOOBASE TX 1000BASE GBIC 100BASE FX S 100BASE FX M 1000BASE T or SFP e MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the IP Address on page 3 19 Configuration e Name Interface label e Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 3 115 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 116 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadca
388. n for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that access the Command Line Interface via Telnet TigerStack Ill 10 100 6824M Managed 24 2 Stackable Switch Manager Systern Name Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 Location Contact System Up Timel0 days 0 hours 32 minutes and 32 78 seconds IODE Connect to textual user interface emIT Send mail to technical support E Connect to SMC Web Page Figure 3 3 System Information BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 4 33 Console config snmp server location WC 9 4 155 Console config snmp server contact Geoff 4 155 Console config end Console show system System description TigerStack III 10 100 6824M Managed 24 2 Stackable Switch SW version V2 4 2 13 System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 System information System Up time 0 days 0 hours 6 minutes and 26 75 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 04 E2 B3 16 C0 Web server enabled Web server port 80 Web secure server enabled Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet server port 23 Authentication login local Authentication enabled local POST result Uart Loopback Test PASS DRAM TSS irawe ot eh olla ides wa EA PASS TINET TESE oirr REEE EERENS PAS
389. name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 Vian ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port channel Ethl 1 S Ethl 2 S Ethl1 3 S Ethl1 4 S Ethl 5 S Ethl 6 S Ethl 7 S Eth1 8 S Ethl1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 s Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Eth1 26 S Console Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This switch supports two types of private VLAN ports promiscuous and community ports A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN Community ports can only communicate with other ports in their own community VLAN and with their designated promiscuous ports This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs Table 4 61 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page Edit Private VLAN Groups private vlan Adds or deletes primary and secondary VC 4 243 VLANs private vlan association Associates a secondary with a primary VC 4 243 VLAN Configure Private VLAN Interfaces switchport mode Sets an inte
390. negotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports 4 173 INTERFACE COMMANDS Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 173 speed duplex 4 172 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only Wh
391. nfiguration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters GC 4 171 interface configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Ethernet 4 190 Dynamic Configuration Command acp Configures LACP for the current IC Ethernet 4 190 interface acp system priority Configures a port s LACP system IC Ethernet 4 192 priority acp admin key Configures a port s administration IC Ethernet 4 193 key acp admin key Configures an port channel s IC Port 4 194 administration key Channel acp pott priority Configures a port s LACP port IC Ethernet 4 195 priority Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 179 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 196 4 188 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to eight ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specifie
392. nfiguration mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified MAC ACL 4 140 source and destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC PE 4 142 ACLs 4 138 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 38 MAC ACL Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page access list mac Changes to the mode for configuring GC 4 143 mask precedence access control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL MAC Mask 4 144 rules show access list mac Shows the ingress or egress rule masks PE 4 146 mask precedence for MAC ACLs mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 146 show mac Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 147 access group map access list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding IC 4 147 output queue for packets matching an ACL tule show map access list Shows CoS value mapped to an access PE 4 148 mac list for an interface match access list mac Changes the 802 1p priority the priority IC 4 149 of a frame frame matching the defined tule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for PE 4 138 packet marking access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters Def
393. ng 3 208 4 262 mapping priorities 3 209 4 263 L link type STA 3 168 3 171 4 223 log in CLI interface 4 1 Web interface 3 3 logging syslog traps 3 37 4 60 to syslog servers 3 38 4 59 logon authentication 3 69 4 97 RADIUS client 3 72 4 100 RADIUS server 3 72 4 100 TACACS client 3 72 4 105 TACACS server 3 72 4 105 Index 2 logon authentication sequence 3 73 4 98 4 99 M main menu 3 6 Management Information Bases MIBs A 4 mirror port configuring 3 136 4 184 MSTP 3 155 4 207 global settings 3 172 4 205 interface settings 4 206 multicast configuring 3 220 4 269 router 3 224 3 225 4 278 P passwords administrator setting 3 3 4 34 path cost 3 167 4 220 method 3 163 4 212 STA 3 163 3 167 4 212 port authentication 3 88 4 110 port power displaying status 3 148 4 95 inline 3 149 4 93 inline status 3 148 4 95 maximum allocation 3 147 4 93 priority 3 150 4 94 showing mainpower 3 147 4 96 port priority configuring 3 202 4 256 default ingress 3 202 4 256 port security configuring 3 85 4 107 port statistics 3 139 4 180 ports broadcast storm threshold 3 135 4 177 ports configuring 3 114 4 170 ports mirroring 3 136 4 184 power budgets port 3 147 4 93 port priority 3 150 4 94 Power over Ethernet configuring 2 15 priority default port ingress 3 202 4 256 priority STA 3 167 4 221 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 72 4 100 rate limits setting 3 138 4 186 rem
394. ng a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Code Bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extended ACL Name mike z z estination Source Destination Control Lesa Sape Soues Suboat Tii Subnet TOS PrecedenceDSOP Protocol Spurc Pon Oemnadon pon
395. nk Groups VLAN Port Configuration 0 000 Displaying Private VLAN Port Information Configuring Primary and Community Private VLANs Associating Community VLANs to Primary VLANs Displaying Private VLAN Port Information Configuring Private VLAN Ports 004 Configuring Class of Service per Port Configuring Traffic Classes n 0 00 00 c cece Setting the Queue Mode 0 0 c cece eee Configuring Class of Service for Each Ingress Queue Setting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Mapping IP Precedence to Class of Service Values Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values Globally Enabling the IP Port Priority Status Mapping Ports and Trunks to IP TCP UDP Priority Mapping Priority Settings to Ports Trunks Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 00000 085 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules Configuring Internet Group Management Protocol Mapping Multicast Switch Ports to VLANs Configuring a VLAN to Forward Multicast Traffic Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services Specifying Multicast Port Membership Configuring DNS 1 0 a a a Mapping IP Addresses toa Host Name Displaying the DNS Cache 0 0 0 0 00000 eee 3 223 3 225 3 226 XXV FIGURES xxvi CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION These switches provide a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching
396. nk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices i e single switch or a stack You can create up to six trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than four ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before yo
397. nnections 2 4 Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 7 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using network management software STACK OPERATIONS Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Stack Operations Up to eight switches can be stacked together as described in the Installation Guide One unit in the stack acts as the Master for configuration tasks and firmware upgrade All of the other units function in Slave mode To configure any unit in the stack first verify the unit number of the switch
398. nning tree Range 1 40 4 218 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the Spanning Tree Algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if 4 219 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree
399. nooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version e 1 IGMP Version 1 e 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp quety max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config 4 271 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 222 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac addtess table multicast vlan v an id
400. ns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 10 2 44 96 893 pttch_pc accton com tw 1 4 CNAME 10 2 44 3 898 ahten smc com 2 4 CNAME 66 218 71 84 298 www yahoo akadns net 3 4 CNAME 66 218 71 83 298 www yahoo akadns net 4 4 CNAME 66 218 71 81 298 www yahoo akadns net 5 4 CNAME 66 218 71 80 298 www yahoo akadns net 6 4 CNAME 66 218 71 89 298 www yahoo akadns net 7 4 CNAME 66 218 71 86 298 www yahoo akadns net 8 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 7 298 www yahoo com Console 4 293 DNS COMMANDS Table 4 75 Show DNS Output Description Field Description NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAIN The domain name associated with this record clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 4 294 APPENDIX A SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIO
401. ntagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Console config if Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 190 Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier e Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member VLAN CONFIGURATION Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port interface amp Port F X j Trunk 1 Query Member Non Member Vian 1 none a Figure 3 81 Assigning VLAN Port and Trunk Groups CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 238 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN
402. ntax dotlx max req count no dotlx max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 4 111 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if dotlx max req 2 Console config dot1x port control This command sets the dotlx mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dotix port control e auto Requires a dotlx aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access e force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx aware or otherwise e force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx port control auto Console config if 4 112 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dotix operation mode single host multi h
403. nterval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config 4 275 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 276 This command configures the snooping report delay Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query
404. o default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached 4 284 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console 4 285 DNS COMMANDS DNS Commands These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that do
405. o prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config snmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default 2 11 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 12 community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap rece
406. o remove the port Syntax mac access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e A port can only be bound to one ACL 4 146 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 142 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 out Console Related Commands mac access group 4 146 map access list mac This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list mac ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 charac
407. oE for copy operations on the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPB file types other than PoE controller may be downloaded but will not adversely affect the system 4 83 FLAsH FILE COMMANDS 4 84 Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode 3 PD Controller lt 1 3 gt 2 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secute site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password x x x Success Console reload System will be
408. oaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file controller file running config startup config tftp unit copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key copy unit file controller Allows you to download new PoE controller code files file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server unit Keyword that allows you to copy to from a specific unit in the stack https certificate Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site certificate public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server See Secure Shell Commands on page 4 44 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 cha
409. ode prompt use one of the following commands e To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt e To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 2 9 INITLAL CONFIGURATION 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP interface vlan IP address and netmask 10 1 0 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Console Enabling SNMP Management Access 2 10 The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as SMC EliteView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter
410. oes not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol e Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 202 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 151 e VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 179 e Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs e GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning iIVL Configurable PVID Tagg
411. of primary VLAN 1 4093 e Association Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN e Non Association Community VLANs not associated with the selected primary VLAN Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Association Select the required primary VLAN from the scroll down box highlight one or more community VLANs in the Non Association list box and click Add to associate these entries with the selected primary VLAN A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN Private VLAN Association Primary VLAN ID 5 7 Association Non Association lt cAdd Remove oa Figure 3 85 Associating Community VLANs to Primary VLANs CLI This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5 Console config vlan database 4 230 Console config vlan private vlan 5 association 6 4 244 Console config vlan private vlan 5 association 7 Console config VLAN CONFIGURATION Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus to display the interfaces associated with private VLANs Command Attributes Port Trunk The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Normal The port is not configured in a private VLAN Host The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with the designated promis
412. of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any adjacent multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes e IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled e Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled MULTICAST FILTERING IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 e IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i
413. og events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command 4 69 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp server 4 70 sntp poll 4 71 show sntp 4 72 sntp server 4 70 This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server 7p7 7p2 7p3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization request
414. ole config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 42 copy tftp https certificate 4 82 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 42 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port Ifyou change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https deviceport_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 41 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 14 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured GC 4 40 from Telnet also specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet It also specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form without the port keyword to disable this function Use the no from with the port keyword to use the default port Syntax
415. ommand Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Type There are two types of VLANs within a private VLAN Primary VLANs Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and to community ports within secondary VLANs e Community VLANs Conveys traffic between community ports and to their associated promiscuous ports e Current Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Configuration Enter the VLAN ID number select Primary or Community type then click Add To remove a private VLAN from the switch highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove Note that all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted page 3 188 Private VLAN Configuration Current New 5 Primary VLAN 6 Community VLAN Add aan ip 1 4093 7 Remove Type Community Figure 3 84 Configuring Primary and Community Private VLANs CLI This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN and VLAN 6 and 7 as community VLANs Console config vlan database 4 230 Console config vlan private vlan 5 primary 4 243 Console config vlan private vlan 6 community Console config vlan private vlan 7 community Console config vlan 3 197 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Assoc 3 198 iating Community VLANs Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN Command Attributes Primary VLAN ID ID
416. ommand sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dsep value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 68 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority 4 265 PRIORITY COMMANDS e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip port This command shows the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet unit port
417. ommands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Syntax enable eve level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec 4 25 GENERAL COMMANDS Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 36 e The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 26 enable password 4 36 disable 4 26 This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 25 COMMAND LINE I
418. on port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 185 RATE LIMIT COMMANDS Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 49 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate IC 4 187 for a port 4 186 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default
419. onfiguration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 30 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands version information Command Group Function Page Device Configures information that uniquely identifies this 4 32 Designation switch User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for 4 34 management access IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management 4 37 access Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 39 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 43 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 44 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 56 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 64 Time Sets the system clock automatically via NIP SNTP 4 68 System Clock server or manually System Status Displays system configuration active managers and 4 75 4 31 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Device Designation Commands Table 4 8
420. onnection make a console connection to the Master unit and enter show ip interface to determine the new stack address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 171 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 280 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 282 Console show ip interface 4 283 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console 3 22 BASIC CONFIGURATION Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the Web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the Web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 282 Console Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can lat
421. onsole show lacp sysid Channel group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 By 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 Console Table 4 54 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC System MAC address Address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 55 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac addtess table static Maps a static address to a port ina GC 4 201 VLAN clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the PE 4 202 dynamic forwarding database show mac address table Displays entries in the PE 4 202 bridge forwarding database mac addtess table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 202 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address PE 4 204 aging time table 4 200 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN
422. ontent garp Garp property gvrp Show gvrp information of interface history nformation of history hosts Host information interfaces nformation of interfaces ip P information lacp LACP statistics line TTY line information log Login records logging Show the contents of logging buffers mac AC access lists mac address table Set configuration of the address table management anagement IP filter map ap priority marking Specify marker port haracteristics of the port power how power public key ublic key information queue nformation of priority queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config Access groups Access lists Bridge extend information he system configuration of running IMP statistics ntp pecify spanning tree ecure shell The system configuration of starting up a S P I Radius server information T Ss Ss s Ss system Information of system tacacs server Login by tacacs server users Display information about terminal lines version System hardware and software status vian Switch VLAN Virtual Interface Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Interface counters information status Interface status information switchport Interface switchport information Console show interfaces ENTERING COMMANDS Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial k
423. or messages for the current firmware release e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 6 The switch allows you to specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Log System Logs Specify the System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory and then click Apply System Logs System Log Status M Enabled Flash Level 0 7 3 Ram Level 0 7 6 Figure 3 15 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 57 Console config logging history ram 6 4 57 Console config Console show logging ram 4 61 Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level informational Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers You can also limit the error messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Command Attributes e Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to
424. ork interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 176 mac address table static 4 201 show mac address table 4 202 4 109 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that 4 110 prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 34 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dot1x Enables or disables 802 1X globally GC 4 111 system auth control dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default GC 4 111 values dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that IC 4 111 the switch retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 112 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x IC
425. ort fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 165 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses e Trunk 2 Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk The following interface attributes can be configured Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier wil
426. ort type 100TX Mac address 00 04 E2 B3 16 D8 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 2 2 4 191 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Configuration ame Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Enabled Port security Disabled ax MAC count 0 Current status Created by LACP Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None ember Ports Eth1l 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Console lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG iden
427. ost max count coun no dotix operation mode multi host max count single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port e multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 20 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dotlx mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 105 In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if 4 113 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS dotix re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dotlx re authenticate interface interface ethernet unit port unit The stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dot1lx re authenticate Console dotix re authentication This command enables periodic re a
428. ote logging 3 37 4 60 RSTP 3 155 4 207 global configuration 3 161 4 207 S Secure Shell See SSH serial port configuring 3 30 4 13 SNMP community string 3 48 4 154 enabling traps 3 50 4 159 trap manager 3 50 4 159 version 3 3 45 3 53 4 156 4 160 4 169 SNTP 3 43 4 68 software downloads 3 24 4 82 software version displaying 3 15 4 80 specifications software A 1 SSH 3 78 4 44 configuring 3 78 4 44 4 48 4 49 STA edge port 3 168 4 221 global settings displaying 4 227 interface settings 3 165 3 169 3 175 3 177 4 219 4 223 4 228 INDEX link type 3 168 3 171 4 223 path cost 3 167 4 220 priority 3 167 4 221 standards IEEE A 3 startup files creating 3 28 4 82 displaying 3 24 4 75 setting 3 24 statistics port 3 139 4 180 STP 3 155 3 161 4 207 switchport mode 3 193 4 234 system clock setting 3 43 4 68 system software downloading from server 3 24 4 82 T TACACS logon authentication 3 72 4 105 time setting 3 43 4 68 trap manager 2 12 3 50 4 159 trunk configuration 3 120 4 188 LACP 3 123 4 190 static 3 121 4 190 U upgrading software 3 24 4 82 user password 3 31 3 33 3 70 4 34 V VLAN displaying basic information 3 184 4 249 VLANs configuring 3 179 4 230 egress mode 3 193 4 234 Index 3 INDEX W Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 4 home page 3 3 menu list 3 6 panel display 3 5 Index 4 FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL
429. ough various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range e end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration 4 37 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just b
430. outing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP 4 280 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config
431. oviding a descriptive name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem SMC6824M 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 28 SMC6824MPE 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 41 SMC6826MPE 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 53 Location Specifies the system location Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet server port Shows the TCP port number used by Telnet Authentication login Defines the login authentication method and precedence Authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode POST result Shows results of the power on self test 3 13 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 14 Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact informatio
432. own Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp setver host command Use the snmp setver host command to specify which host or hosts recetve SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp server group command page 4 164 4 159 SNMP COMMANDS Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 156 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the
433. ows VLAN port type and associated 3 199 primary or secondary VLANs Port Configuration Configures VLAN port type and associated 3 200 primary or secondary VLANs Trunk Information Shows VLAN trunk type and associated 3 199 primary or secondary VLANs Trunk Configuration Configures VLAN trunk type and associated 3 200 primary or secondary VLANs Priority 3 202 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 202 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 202 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output 3 204 queues Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not 3 204 implemented Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted 3 206 Round Robin Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 206 IP Precedence DSCP Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP 3 208 Priority Status Priority or disables both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the 3 209 precedence tag to a class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point 3 211 priority mapping a DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 213 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the 3 213 socket number and associated class of service value 3 11 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 12 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued
434. ows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 69 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1
435. p Name Security Model Security Level SNMPv3 Views Read View defaultview BN cf Write View C defaultview x eee e Notify View defaultview Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 3 66 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Console config snmp server group secure users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview 4 164 Console config exit Console show snmp group 4 165 Group Name secure users Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View defaultview Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes e View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string e Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch w
436. p function 4 61 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 4 62 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 and the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level debugging Console Table 4 19 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history FLASH command History logging in The message level s reported based on the logging history RAM command The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address Console oOo oo ooo ooo o ooo COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 20 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog lo
437. p view 4 163 View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name readaccess Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console User Authentication You can restrict management access to this switch and provide secure network access using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure management access rights for users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface 3 69 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default adminis
438. pe exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt BASIC CONFIGURATION 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config if exit Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration m
439. played have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC EliteView Table 3 11 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to Packets a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer 3 139 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 140 Table 3 11 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen Packets to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Receive
440. playing Port Members of Multicast Services 3 226 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 4 3 228 Configuring Domain Name Service 0 0 6 6 cece eee eee 3 229 Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 229 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 232 Displaying the DNS Cache 0000s 3 234 Command Line Interface 0 6 eee eee eee 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 0 eee ee eee 4 1 Accessing the CLD jini pis Saale oI Moana 2 2h Sunes ii 4 1 Console Connection 60 eee eee ee 4 1 Telet Connections vin wakes kohin ea Pe Des Wale A Gee We 4 2 Entering Commands terae na EATE EA edt E 4 3 Keywords and Arguments n s s ssnsrr rnnr errre 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 0 0 eee 4 4 Command Completion 0 0 0 4 4 Getting Help on Commands 0 0 cece ee eee 4 4 Showing Commands 00 c eee eee 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 0 00 0 0 0c cece eee eee eee 4 6 vii T4BLE OF CONTENTS Negating the Effect of Commands 00000 08 4 6 Using Command History 0 6 06 4 6 Understanding Command Modes 0 0 000 c eee 4 6 Exec Commands ssoi eiaa oa Beta au Siete tits Md 4 7 Configuration Commands 6 6 c cece cee eee ee 4 8 Command Line Processing 6 6 0 6 cece eee eee 4 10 Gomimand Groups sig es eke he a ee ee Bea 4 11 Eme Commands y res gia ne Eeri eaa ie eee hs Mad dee Sivas Patan co sa Reub
441. pliant bridging device is always forwarding 3 165 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 166 If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has changed from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 169 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 169 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received
442. port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPv3 first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 41 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server Enables the SNMPv3 server GC 4 152 show snmp Displays the status of
443. pport for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then uses the EAP between the switch and the authentication server to verify the client s right to access the network via an authentication server i e RADIUS server Other authentication options include HTTPS HTTP SSL for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection SNMP Version 3 IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic o
444. r maximum allocation on page 4 91 The current operating power status displays on or off Mainpower Consumption The current power consumption on the switch in watts Software Version The version of software running on the PoE controller subsystem in the switch This software can be updated using the copy file controller command see page 4 82 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1X Table 4 29 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Defines logon authentication method and 4 97 Sequence precedence RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 100 RADIUS server TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a 4 105 TACACS server Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 107 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports 4 110 using 802 1X Authentication Sequence Table 4 30 Authentication Sequence Command Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and GC 4 98 precedence authentication enable Defines the authentication method and GC 4 99 precedence for command mode change
445. r the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range 1 64 characters Write View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters 3 61 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 62 e Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMP02 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Table 3 5 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label warmStart Object ID 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 Description A warmStart trap signifies th
446. r to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically incre
447. r untagged frames page 4 253 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 250 Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 238 Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 239 Private VLAN mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host promiscuous or none page 4 245 Private VLAN Shows the secondary or community VLAN with which this host association port is associated page 4 245 Private VLAN Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port mapping page 4 246 4 183 MIRROR Port COMMANDS Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 48 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 184 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 185 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to cleat a mirror session Syntax port monitor nterface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Se
448. racters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 lt Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files and three configuration files including the factory defaults file You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the stack Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in the stack The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 77 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS SSL for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 4 41 When updating the PoE controller to the SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE first copy the PD controller file from a TFTP server to the switch s file system copy file tftp and select PD_Controller then copy this file to the controller copy file controller and select PoRk When specifying the file type PD_Controller or P
449. rames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 8 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pait of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree 1 5 IN
450. ransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console config Console config authentication login tacacs 4 98 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 105 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 106 Console config tacacs server key green 4 106 Console config exit Console show tacacs server 4 107 Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server green Server port number 200 Console config Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port 3 75 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 76 If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting
451. rap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 152 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 159 4 157 SNMP COMMANDS 3 4 5 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 162 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 164 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 2 3 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 152 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 159 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 162 4 5 6 7 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 164 Specify a remote engine
452. rations 224 034 pit ERA E RA in E ee 2 5 Selecting the Stack Master 0 cece cece eee ee eee 2 5 Recovering from Stack Failure or Topology Change 2 5 Resilient IP Interface for Management Access 2 6 Basic Contigutation ss iienaa st Lola E est tate hae 2 6 Console Connection 006 2 6 Setting Passwords Ai 42 ty Ske thee Sa eerie 2 7 Setingan IP Address rrian e AG Mae Ss og eae Ae 8 2 7 Manual Configuration 0 0 6 cee ee eee 2 8 Dynamic Configuration 1 0 0 eee eee 2 9 Enabling SNMP Management Access 000 0000008 2 10 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 11 Trap RECEIVES uct he a a nea acne a0 dee agen A 2 12 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 12 Saving Configuration Settings 6 ccc eee 2 13 Managing System Piles 3 0 esse Gee hie Saale hae a Bin ABR 2 14 Configuring Power over Ethernet 0 0 eee cece eee 2 15 Configuring the Switch cece cece eens 3 1 Using the Web Interface aoc0 42 ath eiac sede oo 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 0 0 ee eee eee 3 3 Hom Pages o cr vise tite vay peas pea see ety 3 3 Configuration Options si sos s Eaa aE EE eee 3 4 Panel Display sreasnar para oes Mates E EEE N 3 5 M n Menu parearea en ea A ERS ee ee 3 6 iti T4BLE OF CONTENTS Basic Configuration 23 23Scgeo2 ada wk eee 3 13 Displaying System Information 0 0000 c cee ee eee 3 13
453. rds for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC6824M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router 2 7 INITLAL CONFIGURATION 2 8 Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration
454. re 3 9 Setting the Startup Code To delete a file select System File Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and then click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Name Type Startup Size bytes I Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 2677 I startup Config_File Y 45538 Th 2424 Operation_Code 2433448 Figure 3 10 Deleting Files 3 25 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server select opcode as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console tcopy tftp file 4 82 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode 3 PD Controller lt 1 3 gt 2 Source file name V2 4 2 13 bix Destination file name V24213 7 Console config Console config boot system opcode V24213 4 89 Console config exit Console reload 4 28 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 26 You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Usa
455. re from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Copy Select tftp to file from the drop down menu Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tftp to file Y iTFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 File Type opcode x Source File Name M2 4 2 11 bix C Y24210 x Destination File Name 24211 Figure 3 8 Copy Firmware 3 24 BASIC CONFIGURATION If you download to a new destination file go to the File Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Set Start Up Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfy Config_File N 2677 startup Config_File Y 5465 C v2a210 Operation_Code N 2455012 24211 Operation_Code Y 2454980 Figu
456. requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Note Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch e Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address ip address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Ty
457. resses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP addresses that are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of USER AUTHENTICATION addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP o Address End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry Hi Figure 3 41 Entering IP Addresses to be Filtered CLI This example restricts management access for Telnet and SNMP clients Console config management te Console config management te Console config end Console show manag
458. restarted continue lt y n gt y COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console This ex3ample shows how to download a PoE controller file to the SMC6824MPE or SMC6826MPE from a TFTP server Console copy tftp file TFTP server IP address 10 3 4 50 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode 3 PD Controller lt 1 3 gt 3 Source file name 7012 007 s19 Destination file name PoE test Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a PoE controller file from the SMC6824MPE or SMC6826MPE to another unit in the stack Console copy file controller Unit lt 1 2 gt 2 Choose controller type Te POR 2 NDS 3 TBD lt I 3 gt 2s1 Source file name PoE test Software downloading in progress please wait Unit 1 done Console 4 85 FLAsH FILE COMMANDS delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete unit filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name unit Specifies the stack unit Range 1 8
459. rface to host mode or IC 4 245 private vlan promiscuous mode switchport private vlan Associates an interface with a secondary IC 4 246 host association VLAN switchport private vlan Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC 4 246 mapping 4 241 VLAN COMMANDS 4 242 Table 4 61 Private VLAN Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page Display Private VLAN Information show vlan private vlan Shows private VLAN information NE 4 247 PE To configure private VLANs follow these steps 1 Use the private vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside the community groups Use the private vlan association command to map the secondary e community VLAN s to the primary VLAN Use the switchport mode private vlan command to configure ports as promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host e having access restricted to community VLAN members and channeling all other traffic through a promiscuous port Use the switchport private vlan host association command to assign a port to a secondary VLAN Use the switchport private vlan mapping command to assign a port to a primary VLAN Use the show vlan private vlan command to verify your configuration settings COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ptivate vlan Use this command to create a primary or secondary i e community private VLAN Use t
460. rivate VLANs 0 00 eee eee 3 197 Associating Community VLANs 0 00005 3 198 Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information 3 199 Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces 3 200 Class of Service Configuration 2 0 6 eee eee 3 202 Layer 2 Queue Settings serce a ei a a a 3 202 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 202 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 204 Selecting the Queue Mode 0 00000 rnnr 3 206 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 207 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 0 00 0 eee eee eee 3 208 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 208 Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 208 Mapping IP Precedence 0 ee eee eee eee 3 209 Mapping DSCP Priority 0 eee eee eee 3 211 Mapping IP Port Priority 00 e eee eee eee 3 213 Copy Settinas ict isl scree ig te acai Oh std EEA 3 215 Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 0000000 3 216 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules 3 218 Multicast Filtering st sona sk genet digg bode ea ASS 3 220 IGMP Protocols iy wheel e a a Bd ten PS leaned 3 220 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 6 6 06 0 cece 3 221 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 222 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 224 Specifying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 225 Dis
461. rolled within a configured power budget Port power can be automatically turned on and off for connected devices and a per port power priority can be set so that the switch never exceeds its allocated power budget When a device is connected to a switch port its power requirements are detected by the switch before power is supplied If 3 145 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH the power required by a device exceeds the power budget of the port or the whole switch power is not supplied Ports can be set to one of three power priority levels critical high or low To control the power supply within the switch s budget ports set at critical ot high priority have power enabled in preference to those ports set at low priority For example when a device is connected to a port set to critical priority the switch supplies the required power if necessary by dropping power to ports set for a lower priority If power is dropped to some low priority ports and later the power demands on the switch fall back within its budget the dropped power is automatically restored Switch Power Status Displays the Power over Ethernet parameters for the switch Command Attributes e Maximum Available Power The configured power budget for the switch System Operation Status The PoE power service provided to the switch ports e Mainpower Consumption The amount of power being consumed by PoE devices connected to the switch Thermal Tempera
462. rrors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size
463. rts SMC6826MPE Combination 1000BASE T SFP ports e Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number A230042447 Number of Ports 25 Hardware Version RoB Internal Power Status Active Management Software Loader Version 2 1 2 0 Boot ROM Version 2 1 2 10 Operation Code Version 2 4 2 13 Role Master Expansion Slot Expansion Slot 1 Stacking Module Expansion Slot 2 Not Present Figure 3 4 General Switch Information CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 80 Unit 1 Serial number A230042447 Service tag Hardware version ROB Module A type Stacking Module Module B type not present Number of ports 25 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit ID 1 Loader version 2 12250 Boot ROM version 2 1 2 10 Operation code version 2 4 2 13 Console 3 17 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 18 The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch d
464. rward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured e Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree EEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree EEE 802 1s Spanning tree backup root Automatically lowers the switch s bridge priority by 4096 if it loses contact with the current root device To succeed the switch must have a direct connection to current root bridge and its adjusted bridge priority must be higher i e a numerically lower value than all the other bridges in the spanning tree Ins
465. s 4 218 mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst nstance_id vlan vlan range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4093 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 217 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each 4 215 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console
466. s based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config Related Commands sntp client 4 69 sntp poll 4 71 show sntp 4 72 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp poll 250 Console config 4 71 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Related Commands sntp client 4 69 show sntp 4 72 This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 11 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clock timezon
467. s before mapping an ACL to an interface Ifyou enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console config access list ip standard A2 config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 config std acl exit config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl 4 131 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS 4 132 This sh
468. s learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 7 Web Only 3 151 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 x Trunk MAC Address J VLAN fi Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 66 Mapping Ports to Static Addresses CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac addre
469. s list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console 4 145 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show access list mac mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 144 mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form t
470. s map 4 257 show map access list ip 4 136 show map access list ip This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list ip n erface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list ip Access list to COS of Eth 1 4 Access list ALS1 cos 0 Console 4 136 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands map access list ip 4 135 match access list ip This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list ip ac _name set priority priority set tos fos_value set dscp dscp_value no match access list ip ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 15 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority tos_value IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e dscp_value Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities
471. s the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message 4 209 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config 4 210 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree default priority Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority to use increments specified by IEEE 802 1D steps of 1 or 802 1t steps of 4096
472. s to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level level level One of the system message levels page 4 58 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 65 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an ad
473. server to verify user identity and access rights When a client i e Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method must be MD5 The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch USER AUTHENTICATION allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of 802 1X on the switch requires the following e The switch must have an IP address assigned e RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified 802 1X must be enabled globally for the switch e Each switch port that will be used must be set to dotlx Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated
474. set the private VLAN interface type and associate the interfaces with a private VLAN Command Attributes Port Trunk The switch interface e PVLAN Port Type Sets the private VLAN port types Normal The port is not configured into a private VLAN Host The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with the designated promiscuous port s Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs If PVLAN type is Promiscuous then specify the associated primary VLAN For Host type the Primary VLAN displayed is the one to which the selected secondary VLAN has been associated e Secondary VLAN On this switch all secondary VLANs are community VLANs A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated VLAN CONFIGURATION promiscuous ports If PVLAN Port Type is Host then specify the associated secondary VLAN Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Port Configuration or Private VLAN Trunk Configuration Set the PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN For promiscuous ports set the associated primary VLAN For host ports set the associated secondary VLAN After all the ports have
475. show MAKITA dae Mia ed Aidan Mes te bale Suttle 4 138 MAC ACES aiot a i A a A renee Aad cs Seton bh ee cs 4 138 Access list mas oein creases E A eae ee p 4 139 permit deny MAC ACL 0 ee eee 4 140 show mac access list n n ce cece eee eee 4 142 access list mac mask precedence 0 000005 4 143 mask MAC ACH eia aie Vitae lain sss Sind Ga a Gens aed 4 144 show access list mac mask precedence 4 146 MAC ACCESS QFOUP 6 cee eee eee 4 146 show mac acceSS QfOUP 6 ee eee eee eee 4 147 map access list MaC 6 eee eee 4 147 show map access list Mac 1 6 eee eee 4 148 match access list Mac 1 1 eee eee 4 149 ACI Information ics cin eet A edie eae 4 150 show access list fo sunto ek ee e ea ee itd og ea wos 4 150 ShOW ACCESS QLOUP oda p ee ee eee eee ee 4 151 SNMP Commands 2 tigen Se od EAA E Segall Sed aN thes 4 151 SHP SETVE a a a A E E eae eee aon aes 4 152 Show SHIP raio a AE Sai A a cies aa 4 153 snmp server COMMUNItY s ss sses ee eee 4 154 smmp setver CONtACt aaas sass r tee ee 4 154 snmp server location 1 0 eee eee ee 4 155 Snip Server Dost ois mirana aus Mad oe Hak Mo evan 4 156 snmp server enable traps 2 6 cece eee 4 159 smmp server engine id 2 ee eee eee 4 160 show snmp engine id 6 0 6 4 161 Snip Server VIEW fei vied a tea eee A Ee a 4 162 Show SNMP VIEW e aes a a eee ee ee eens 4 163 snmp server group 2 ee eee eee ee ce eens 4 164 Show SNMp lt PTOUP is wicks soci c
476. show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map nterface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Tratti Class 220 1 2 3 Priority Queue 1001 Console Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 66 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service mapping GC 4 261 map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class of service IC 4 262 map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service GC 4 262 mapping map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of IC 4 263 service map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 264 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 265 map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding output IC 4 135 queue for packets matching an ACL rule 4 260 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Table 4 66 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map access list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output IC 4 147 queue for packets matching an ACL rule show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 266 show map ip Shows the IP preceden
477. sion before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dotlx timeout tx period seconds no dotix timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if dotlx timeout tx period 300 Console config if show dotlx This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface nterface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port e interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 4 116 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802 1X including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts page 4 113 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 112 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interfac
478. sk MAC Ingress Table Source Bitmask Destination Bitmask VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Mask Remove 00 11 11 11 11 11 Any Enabled Remove Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any z Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any z Destination Bitmask 00 00 00 VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Mask I Enabled Taan Figure 3 48 Configuring an ACL MAC Mask 3 111 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 4 139 Console config mac acl permit any any 4 140 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 4 140 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 4 150 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 4 143 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 4 144 Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 4 171 Console config if mac access group M4 in 4 146 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console
479. snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 279 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Specifying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch 3 225 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Interface Pon Add manon Remove Pon fi Trunk hal none Figure 3 102 Statically Configuring a VLAN to Forward Multicast Tr
480. sole 1 line vty 1 end Console COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands show running config 4 77 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by command and corresponding commands This command displays the cep symbols and includes the configuration mode following information IP address or address mode MAC address for each switch in the stack SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Event logging configuration Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state Spanning tree settings VLAN configuration settings for each interface Layer 4 precedence settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 77 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show running config 1 IP address DHCP 1 phymap 00 04 e2 b3 16 c0 00 30 f1 b0 e9 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 SNTP server 10 1 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 snmp server community public ro snmp server community priv
481. sole 2 Console config Console config teload 4 28 This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system end exit COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any 4 29 GENERAL COMMANDS Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console texit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit Use this command to exit the c
482. ss rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write 7 Figure 3 23 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 154 Console config 3 49 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 50 Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as SMC EliteView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other notification messages from the switch Command Usage If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the Trap Manager Community String is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use V3 authentication or encryption options authNoPriv or authPriv the user name must first be defined in the SNMPv3 Users page page 3 70 Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the no authentication noAuth
483. ss table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 201 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface 3 152 ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 e Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN ot interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned e Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by Interface Port Trunk z I MAC Address cd F VLAN E Address Table Sort Key Address v Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 67 Displaying th
484. ss to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 70 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware 3 79 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 80 only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921 143173880 05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 696317813662774141689851320491 17204830339254324101637997592371449011938 00609025394840848271781943722884025331 15952134861022902978982721 3532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa mat
485. st 10 1 1 21 4 124 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address 3 101 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 102 Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 100 Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15 DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 63 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Source Destination Port Bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representi
486. st of weights for each traffic class i e queue e Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 255 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Traffic Class 0 weight 1 Traffic Class 1 weight 4 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 16 Traffic Class 3 weight 64 Weight Value 1 255 Figure 3 91 Configuring Class of Service for Each Ingress Queue 19 CLI shows Queue ID 3 207 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights of 1 4 16 and 64 to the CoS priority queues 0 1 2 and 3 Console config queue bandwidth 1 4 16 64 4 255 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 4 259 Queue ID Weight Console Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent
487. st storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Current status e Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down e Port operation status Provides detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up e Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 13 Information of Eth 1 13 Basic information Port type Mac address Configuration Name Port admin Speed duplex Capabilities Broadcast storm Broadcast storm limit Flow control LACP Port security ax MAC count Port security action Current status Link status Port operation status Flow control type Console Operation speed duplex Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 13 100TX 00 30 F1 BO E7 AD Up Auto 10half Enabled 500 packets second En
488. started size The length of the file in bytes 4 87 FLAsH FILE COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte Unitl D21210 Boot Rom image Y 420408 V24213 Operation Code Yi 2454828 Factory Default _Config cfg Config File Y 2677 Total free space 3932160 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte Unitl D21210 Boot Rom image Me 420408 V24213 Operation Code Y 2454828 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File y 2677 Console 4 88 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE boot system Use this command to specify the file or image used to start up the system Syntax boot system unit boot rom config opcode fname The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or image name e unif Specifies the stack unit Range 1 8 The colon is required Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A colon is required after
489. stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console 4 181 INTERFACE COMMANDS show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport n erface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 25 Information of
490. status Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 2 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 3 enable on 5400 7505 Low Eth 4 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 5 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 6 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 7 enable on 5400 8597 Low Eth 23 enable off 5400 0 Low Eth 24 enable off 5400 0 Low Console 4 95 POWER OVER ETHERNET COMMANDS Table 4 27 show power inline status parameters Parameter Description Admin The power mode set on the port see power inline on page 4 93 Oper The current operating power status displays on or off Power mWatt The maximum power allocated to this port see power inline maximum allocation on page 4 93 Power used Priority The current power consumption on the port in milliwatts The port s power priority setting see power inline priority on page 4 94 show power mainpower 4 96 Use this command Command Mode Privileged Exec Example to display the current power status for the switch Console show powe Unit 1 Mainpower Maximum Availabl System Operation Mainpower Consum Software Version Console r mainpower Status e Power 375 watts Status on ption 15 watts Version 0x1B64 Build 0x07 Table 4 28 show power mainpower parameters Parameter Description Maximum Available Power System Operation Status The available power budget for the switch see power mainpowe
491. status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output raz no tate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate e rate Maximum value in Mbps Default Setting e Fast Ethernet interface 100 Mbps e Gigabit Ethernet interface 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The range is Fast Ethernet interface 1 to 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet interface 8 to 1000 Mbps Resolution The increment of change Fast Ethernet interface 1 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet interface 8 Mbps Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 10 Console config if 4 187 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 50 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Co
492. stination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared 25 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 126 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned e You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified e The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement
493. strict priority queuing Command Attributes e WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 4 16 64 for queues 0 through 3 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WRR j Figure 3 90 Setting the Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 257 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 259 Queue mode strict Console CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 204 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes e WRR Setting Table Displays a li
494. switch page 3 225 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch 3 221 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 228 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 222 You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicast filters accordingly IGMP Query A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role
495. switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the cap
496. t Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 138 Port Configuration Input Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 138 Trunk Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 138 Port Configuration Output Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 138 Trunk Configuration Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 139 PoE 3 145 Power Status Displays the status of global power 3 146 parameters Power Config Configures the power budget for the switch 3 147 Power Port Status Displays the status of port power parameters 3 148 Power Port Config Configures port power parameters 3 149 Address Table 3 151 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or 3 151 VLAN Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address 3 152 Table Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 154 Spanning Tree 3 154 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 156 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA 3 160 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 165 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 165 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 10 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 169 MSTP VLAN Confi
497. t can be managed by the CLI program web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 26 for more information e Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI web and SNMP management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 23 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files and three configuration files including the factory defaults file In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should b
498. t field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus 4 55 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467750546173253136748908365472541502024559319 9868544358361651999923329781766065830 95861082591321289023376546801726 272571413428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677 29848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877 9454524083971 752646358058176716709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaClkc3MAAACBAPWKZT PbsRIB8 ydEXcxM3dyV yrDbKStI1lnzDDg0h2 HxcYV44sXZ2J3XhamLK 6P8bvui yacWbUWa 4 PAtp1 KMSdqsKeh 3hKoA3vRRS y1N2XFfAKx1 5fwFfvJ1lPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwi QXbKTBHO Z4mU ZpE85 PWxDZMaCNBPJ BrRAAAAFOChb4 vsdfQGNI jwbvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAs y5YWDC99ebYHNRjJ5kh47wY4i8cZvHt p9cnrfwF TMUO1VED1y3IR 2G395NLy50d7ZDxfA9mCOfTyyE fbobMJZi 80GCstSNOxrZZVnMqwrTY fdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg451loAc27s 6TLdtnylwRqow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ 8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOyDbs1oBfPuSAb4o0As yj KXKVYNLOKTLZ cFRu41bS2KV5LAwec sigF DjKGWt PNIQqabKgYCw20 dVzxX4Ggt yqdT1lYmGA7 HGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYP XFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7wOW Console Event Logging Commands Table 4 17 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 57 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory GC 4 57 based on severit
499. t for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty v gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where z indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC6824M is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port ENTERING COMMANDS You can enter commands as follows e To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config e To enter commands that require parameters
500. t up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory 4 75 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 4 16 This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by P command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information symbols and includes the configuration mode Users names and access levels SNMP community strings Event logging configuration VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for VLANs Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest 1 enable password level 15 0 super 1 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface ethernet 1 26 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 1 line con
501. ta ees 4 34 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS enable password 11 0 cece cece eee eee ees 4 36 TP Filter Commands esaa 4 keran 4 cage ele id Sages 4 4 37 MANAGEMENt oa isha Alas hess 4 37 show management 1 6 cece eee eee 4 38 Web Server Commands 0 00 cece cece eee 4 39 ip sHttpiport meae an A a Maen aa ARAE A 4 40 ip http server ar a inae A A A R ede aed 4 40 ipshttp SECULE SELVEL shania ain el a oine a hata oe ishing Ra 4 41 ip http secure port Pe n eee eee 4 42 Telnet Server Commands 0 0 0 cee eee eee 4 43 ipstelnetsetver manna na a a AAA EER 4 43 Secure Shell Commands 0 cece eee eee ee 4 44 ip Ssh Seivers sic Ate a is Ae eae Ae 4 47 iprSshiWMeout sans Py oe te hs A O Ea bal 4 48 ip ssh authentication retties 0 6 6 c eee eee 4 49 ip ssh servet key sensatie ean aaea cee eee 4 50 delete public key 0 0 0 cece E 4 50 ip ssh crypto host key generate 0 0000 0 ee 4 51 ipssshiCtyptoZeroize a a a ated cot cae ke 4 52 ip ssh save host key aao cece ee eee 4 52 SHOWpP SSH oaks ote teat Peet ayia ae ae es 4 53 Show sshit a siepata Sled oN atthe anti ee wee doy 4 53 show public key 2 0 0 runnerunner 4 55 Event Logging Commands 6 c cece cece 4 56 ISS OIG OT a ins aakiece ha fa nies igh Saale Ban ald eats Saas eee 4 57 lopoino history ria rc ce ba ae tan aah tot a aaas 4 57 logoing host 22 228 0a idee Ae ein Arad ikea ae 4 59 logon facility pissaa este te aks
502. tagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated VLAN CONFIGURATION by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP St
503. tance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST e VLANs configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST 3 157 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 158 e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting inform
504. tatus of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors 0 No such name errors 0 Bad values errors 0 General errors 0 Response PDUs 0 Trap PDUs oooo0coced SNMP logging disabled Console 4 153 SNMP COMMANDS snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community s ring ro rw no snmp server community string e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 e ro Specifies read only
505. te VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 57 VLAN Commands and state vlan database 4 230 This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 240 vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan v an id name v an name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan v an id name state vlan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be
506. ter west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Note The maximum value is 13 00 Current Time Jan 1 00 20 15 2001 Name Dhaka Hours 0 13 6 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction e Before UTC After UTC Figure 3 21 Setting the Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Pacific hours 8 minute 0 before UTC 4 69 Console Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management 3 45 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 46 Information Base MIB that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information o
507. terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable s to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows e Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 e Set to any of the following baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages e Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity e Set flow control to none e Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys 2 3 INITLAL CONFIGURATION Notes 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 13 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 11 Remote Co
508. ters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 4 147 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule By default a packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below Table 4 39 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACL Rules Queue 0 1 2 3 Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if map access list mac M5 cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 257 show map access list mac 4 148 show map access list mac This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list mac n erface interface ethernet wnit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 4 148 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list mac Access list to COS of Eth 1 5 Access list M5 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list mac 4 147 match access list mac This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL mar
509. ters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 34 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local z RADIUS Settings O Global Sererndex C1 C2 C3 CH C5 Server Port Number 1 65535 181 Secret Text String ae Number of Server Transmits 1 30 5 Timeout for a reply 1 65535 10 sec TACACS Settings _ Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 1 65535 149 Secret Text String Figure 3 32 Authentication Server Settings USER AUTHENTICATION CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 98 Console config radius server port 181 4 102 Console config radius server key green 4 102 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 103 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 103 Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 4 101 Console config exit Console show radius server 4 104 Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Ret
510. that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last The protocol version number carried in the most recently EAPOLVer received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator USER AUTHENTICATION Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Porfa sl Query Rx EXPOL Start Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid Rx Last EAPOLSre 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total Tx EAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Resp id Tx EAP Reg ld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth olojojojojo
511. the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local 2 CLI only 3 33 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Telnet Status M Enabled Telnet Port Number Bo Login Timeout 0 300 foo secs
512. the MST 4 218 multiple spanning tree max hops Configures the maximum number of hops MST 4 218 allowed in the region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 214 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of IC 4 220 an interface spanning tree Configures the spanning tree priority of an IC 4 221 port priority interface 4 205 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Table 4 56 Spanning Tree Commands Continued configuration g configuration Command Function Mode Page spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 221 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 222 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP IC 4 223 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in IC 4 224 the MST spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in the IC 4 225 port priority MST spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 226 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the PE 4 227 common spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree PE 4 229 spanning tree 4 206 This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable
513. the rule e A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 144 mac access group 4 146 4 143 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vd bitmask ethertype ethertype bitmask e pktformat Check the packet format field If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a single node e source bitmask Source address of tule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field vid bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask e ethertype Check the Ethernet type field ethertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None
514. the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs e End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging 3 179 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Assigning Ports to VLANs 3 180 Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the
515. the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config snmp server user steve group r d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 01000000000000000000000000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 45 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Authentication T
516. tifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems 4 192 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel admin key matches if configured If the port channel admin key acp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value o
517. tion Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius setver This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console 4 104 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System ACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 32 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 105 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network GC 4 106 port tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 106 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 107 tacacs setver host This command specifies the TACACS server
518. to 4 M Enabled Discarding fi128 200000 Auto Enabled I Enabled 4 Lt 7 2 5 M Enabled Discarding 128 200000 Auto Enabled I Enabled zj Figure 3 72 Configuring Spanning Tree Algorithm per Port 3 171 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 221 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 220 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 223 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 221 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 4 226 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled 4 214 Console config if Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3 172 MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 163 with the same set of instances and the sa
519. to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port Ifingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 18 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled VLAN CONFIGURATION e GARP Join Timer 5 The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 e GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group
520. to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 show ssh 4 53 ip ssh timeout 4 48 This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 18 show ip ssh 4 53 ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is r
521. tp secure setrver Allows the switch to be monitored or configured GC 4 40 from a browset Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted GC 4 41 communications ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4 42 SSL 4 39 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 40 ip http server 4 40 This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 40 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mo
522. trator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Defaults admin and guest e New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user 3 70 USER AUTHENTICATION Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account enter the user name access level and password then click Add To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account m admin Privileged User Name guest Normal lt lt Add Access Level Normal x Remove Password Confirm Password Change Password sername P o New Password Confirm Password Change E Figure 3 31 Configuring User Accounts CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 34 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config
523. tting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port ina completely unobtrusive manner 4 184 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor n erface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 26 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destinati
524. ture The internal temperature of the switch Software Version The version of software running on the PoE controller subsystem in the switch 6 This parameter is not supported for the current hardware 3 146 PowseR OVER ETHERNET SETTINGS Web Click PoE Power Status Mainpower Status Maximum Available Power 375 watts System Operation Status lon Mainpower Consumption lo watts Thermal Temperature in Celsius Software Version Version 0x1B64 Build 0x07 Figure 3 62 Displaying the Global PoE Status CLI This example displays the current power status for the switch Console show power mainpower 4 96 Unit 1 Mainpower Status Maximum Available Power 375 watts System Operation Status on Mainpower Consumption 0 watts Software Version Version 0x1B64 Build 0x07 Console Setting a Switch Power Budget A maximum PoE power budget for the switch power available to all switch ports can be defined so that power can be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power Command Attributes Power Allocation The power budget for the switch If devices connected to the switch require more power than the switch budget the port power priority settings are used to
525. type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New none Source Unit 1 7 Add Source Port 1 z lt e Type Px gt Remove Target Unit 1 7 Target Pot 1 Figure 3 59 Configuring a Mirror Port CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 171 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 4 184 3 137 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Rate Limits 3 138 This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate Fast Ethernet 1
526. u connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to six trunks on the switch with up to four ports per trunk Note that because the stack functions conceptually as a single system you can include ports from different units in the same trunk For example you could connect ports spread across several units that belong VLAN 2 into a common trunk e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports PORT CONFIGURATION When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings Trunk ports must all be of the same media type i e all JOOBASE T 1000BASE TX SX LX LH or all 1OOBASE FX All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STA VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you be able to link switches of statically may not be able to link switches o configured different types depending on the A manufacturer s implementation ZE However note that the static trunks on eee this switch are Cisco EtherChannel active compatible links
527. umber of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count e action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Default Setting e Status Disabled e Action None e Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 108 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a netw
528. unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 50 and Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 54 SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 54 Remote IP The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP
529. unking using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and address learning Store and Forward Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad Switching frames Spanning Tree Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Protocol and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query SMC6824MPE and SMC6826MPE only Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Untagged port based and tagged VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides su
530. uous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with all other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN as well as with all the ports in the associated secondary VLANs Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport mode private vlan promiscuous Console config exit Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host Console config 4 245 VLAN COMMANDS switchport private vlan host association Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN Use the no form to remove this association Syntax switchport private vlan host association secondary vlan id no switchport private vlan host association secondary vlan id ID of secondary i e community VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage All ports assigned to a secondary i e community VLAN can pass traffic between group members but must communicate with resources outside of the group via a promiscuous port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 3 Console config switchport private vlan mapping Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN Use the no form to remove this mapping Syntax switchport private vlan mapping primary vlan id no switchport pr
531. up of a user click Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users 1 Delete SerName Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions DefaultROGroup V1 noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group snmpv3users V3 authPriv MD5 DESS6 Change Gr snmpyausers V3 authNoPriv MD5 None SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Name G Group Name C snmpv3users z Security Model SNMPv3 Users Edit Security Level User Authentication Authentication Protocol user Name david G Authentication P d Group Name uthentication Passwort p 7 DetautROGroup E Data Privacy Privacy Protocol Back _Change Privacy Password Figure 3 27 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 3 57 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user chris group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 167 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 169 EngineId 80000034030001f488f 5200000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3 58 Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a
532. ure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 802 1X Global Information 0 000008 3 89 802802 1X Global Configuration s sessa seess 3 90 802 1X Port Configuration 00 eee eee 3 92 Displaying 802 1X Statistics 0 eee eee eee 3 95 Entering IP Addresses to be Filtered 3 97 Selecting ACL Type se eitad Aik ha les aAA 3 100 Configuring Standard IP ACLs 0000 3 101 Configuring Extended IP ACLs 00 3 103 Configuring MAC ACLs 0 0 c eee 3 106 Choosing ACL Types 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 108 Configuring an IP based ACL 000000 3 109 Configuring an ACL MAC Mask 00 3 111 Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Egress Queues 3 113 Port Port Information 00 0 0 eee eee 3 115 Configuring Port Attributes 0 0000 3 119 Static Trunk Configuration 0 6 0 6 cee eee 3 122 LACP Port Configuration 0000000 eee 3 124 LACP Aggregation Port Configuration 3 127 Displaying LACP Port Counters Information 3 129 Displaying LACP Port Information 3 132 Displaying Remote LACP Port Information 3 134 Enabling Port Broadcast Control 44 3 135 Configuring a Mirror Port 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 137 Configuring Input Port Rate Limiting 3 138 Pott Statistics 2 2 03 4 s cakareh cake been cod A aden 3 144 Displaying th
533. us Enabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN mapping NONE Console Configuring Port Mirroring 3 136 You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic S Singl analyzer or RMON probe to the target Sori erat port and study the traffic crossing the port source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port PORT CONFIGURATION Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Unit The unit whose port traffic will be monitored Range 1 8 Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 26 e Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Default Rx e Target Unit The unit whose port will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 8 e Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic from the source port Range 1 26 Web Click Port Mirror Specify the source port the traffic
534. us enabled Role root State forwarding External path cost 200000 Internal path cost 200000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 10 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled 3 174 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 214 Console config mst mst 1 priority 4096 4 216 Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 4 215 Console config mst Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 165 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 gt Pon STA Status rneidons Cast Bidge Port Link Type ledge Port R l ember 1 Forwarding 1 0 32768 0 0000E8AA
535. uthentication for a specified port Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dotlx re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if dotlx re authentication Console config if 4 114 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dotlx timeout quiet period seconds no dotix timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config dotlx timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds no dotix timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 115 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication ses
536. ve host key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type 4 52 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console 4 53 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 4 54 Table 4 16 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started Username The user name of the client Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for S
537. ver the network The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 clients This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as SMC EliteView Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models with each model having it s own security levels There are three security models defined SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Users are assigned to groups that are defined by a security model and specified security levels Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing which are known as views The switch has a default view all MIB objects and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Table 3 4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels
538. w microsoft akadns net B l4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 hwww microsoft akadns net 5 j4 AUAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw Z 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 6 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 i4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com n0 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net x Figure 3 107 Displaying the DNS Cache CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache 4 293 NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 8 4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net Console 3 235 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 236 CHAPTER 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connect
539. witch s IP interface to which it is connected e Ifyou ate trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag If you cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time TROUBLESHOOTING Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Cannot connect using Secure Shell Action Ifyou cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time e Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client e Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password e Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication is used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection e Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate set to any of the following 960
540. word specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the uset s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line 4 15 LINE COMMANDS Related Commands username 4 34 password 4 16 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the syste
541. y logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will GC 4 59 receive logging messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog GC 4 59 messages logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server GC 4 60 based on severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 61 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 61 show log Displays log messages PE 4 63 4 56 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 57 clear logging 4 61 logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram ve no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory 4 57 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e
542. y and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Glossary 6 GLOSSARY Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus ACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol
543. y a multicast server the a n broadcast traffic must be carefully Non Ye pruned at every multicast switch router it J L i passes through to ensure that traffic is C C C C only passed on the hosts which subscribed to this service This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN IGMP Protocol The Internet Group Management Protocol GMP runs between hosts and their immediately adjacent multicast router switch IGMP is a 3 220 MULTICAST FILTERING multicast host registration protocol that allows any host to inform its local router that it wants to receive transmissions addressed to a specific multicast group A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch
544. y specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management 4 38 This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Global Configuration COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show management all client Management Ip Filter Http Client Start ip address End ip address 1 192 268 1119 192 168 1 19 2 292 5168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Snmp Client Start ip address End ip address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet Client Start ip address End ip address 1 19251768 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console Web Setver Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser GC 4 40 interface ip http server ip ht
545. y up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence e RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings Server Index Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 3 73 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 74 e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 charac
546. ype Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory e Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 52 ip ssh save host key 4 52 4 51 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 51 ip ssh save host key 4 52 no ip ssh server 4 47 ip ssh sa

SMC Networks SMC6824M User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents